WO2009125677A1 - Method for producing wafer lens and wafer lens - Google Patents
Method for producing wafer lens and wafer lens Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- WO2009125677A1 WO2009125677A1 PCT/JP2009/056094 JP2009056094W WO2009125677A1 WO 2009125677 A1 WO2009125677 A1 WO 2009125677A1 JP 2009056094 W JP2009056094 W JP 2009056094W WO 2009125677 A1 WO2009125677 A1 WO 2009125677A1
- Authority
- WO
- WIPO (PCT)
- Prior art keywords
- group
- master
- resin
- sub
- carbon atoms
- Prior art date
Links
Images
Classifications
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02B—OPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
- G02B3/00—Simple or compound lenses
- G02B3/0006—Arrays
- G02B3/0012—Arrays characterised by the manufacturing method
- G02B3/0031—Replication or moulding, e.g. hot embossing, UV-casting, injection moulding
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B29—WORKING OF PLASTICS; WORKING OF SUBSTANCES IN A PLASTIC STATE IN GENERAL
- B29C—SHAPING OR JOINING OF PLASTICS; SHAPING OF MATERIAL IN A PLASTIC STATE, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; AFTER-TREATMENT OF THE SHAPED PRODUCTS, e.g. REPAIRING
- B29C39/00—Shaping by casting, i.e. introducing the moulding material into a mould or between confining surfaces without significant moulding pressure; Apparatus therefor
- B29C39/003—Shaping by casting, i.e. introducing the moulding material into a mould or between confining surfaces without significant moulding pressure; Apparatus therefor characterised by the choice of material
- B29C39/006—Monomers or prepolymers
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B29—WORKING OF PLASTICS; WORKING OF SUBSTANCES IN A PLASTIC STATE IN GENERAL
- B29C—SHAPING OR JOINING OF PLASTICS; SHAPING OF MATERIAL IN A PLASTIC STATE, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; AFTER-TREATMENT OF THE SHAPED PRODUCTS, e.g. REPAIRING
- B29C39/00—Shaping by casting, i.e. introducing the moulding material into a mould or between confining surfaces without significant moulding pressure; Apparatus therefor
- B29C39/02—Shaping by casting, i.e. introducing the moulding material into a mould or between confining surfaces without significant moulding pressure; Apparatus therefor for making articles of definite length, i.e. discrete articles
- B29C39/021—Shaping by casting, i.e. introducing the moulding material into a mould or between confining surfaces without significant moulding pressure; Apparatus therefor for making articles of definite length, i.e. discrete articles by casting in several steps
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02B—OPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
- G02B1/00—Optical elements characterised by the material of which they are made; Optical coatings for optical elements
- G02B1/04—Optical elements characterised by the material of which they are made; Optical coatings for optical elements made of organic materials, e.g. plastics
- G02B1/041—Lenses
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B29—WORKING OF PLASTICS; WORKING OF SUBSTANCES IN A PLASTIC STATE IN GENERAL
- B29C—SHAPING OR JOINING OF PLASTICS; SHAPING OF MATERIAL IN A PLASTIC STATE, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; AFTER-TREATMENT OF THE SHAPED PRODUCTS, e.g. REPAIRING
- B29C35/00—Heating, cooling or curing, e.g. crosslinking or vulcanising; Apparatus therefor
- B29C35/02—Heating or curing, e.g. crosslinking or vulcanizing during moulding, e.g. in a mould
- B29C35/08—Heating or curing, e.g. crosslinking or vulcanizing during moulding, e.g. in a mould by wave energy or particle radiation
- B29C35/0805—Heating or curing, e.g. crosslinking or vulcanizing during moulding, e.g. in a mould by wave energy or particle radiation using electromagnetic radiation
- B29C2035/0827—Heating or curing, e.g. crosslinking or vulcanizing during moulding, e.g. in a mould by wave energy or particle radiation using electromagnetic radiation using UV radiation
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B29—WORKING OF PLASTICS; WORKING OF SUBSTANCES IN A PLASTIC STATE IN GENERAL
- B29C—SHAPING OR JOINING OF PLASTICS; SHAPING OF MATERIAL IN A PLASTIC STATE, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; AFTER-TREATMENT OF THE SHAPED PRODUCTS, e.g. REPAIRING
- B29C35/00—Heating, cooling or curing, e.g. crosslinking or vulcanising; Apparatus therefor
- B29C35/02—Heating or curing, e.g. crosslinking or vulcanizing during moulding, e.g. in a mould
- B29C35/08—Heating or curing, e.g. crosslinking or vulcanizing during moulding, e.g. in a mould by wave energy or particle radiation
- B29C35/0888—Heating or curing, e.g. crosslinking or vulcanizing during moulding, e.g. in a mould by wave energy or particle radiation using transparant moulds
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B29—WORKING OF PLASTICS; WORKING OF SUBSTANCES IN A PLASTIC STATE IN GENERAL
- B29L—INDEXING SCHEME ASSOCIATED WITH SUBCLASS B29C, RELATING TO PARTICULAR ARTICLES
- B29L2011/00—Optical elements, e.g. lenses, prisms
- B29L2011/0016—Lenses
Definitions
- the present invention relates to a wafer lens manufacturing method and a wafer lens.
- Curing resins can be broadly classified into photo-curing resins and thermosetting resins.
- the photocurable resin include an acrylic resin, an allyl resin, an epoxy resin, and the like. If the acrylic resin and the allyl resin are used, they can be cured by radical polymerization. Any epoxy resin can be cured by cationic polymerization.
- the thermosetting resin can be cured by addition polymerization such as silicone in addition to radical polymerization and cationic polymerization.
- a UV curable resin for the wafer lens, it is preferable to use a UV curable resin as a constituent material of the optical member because of its high curing speed.
- a radical polymerization type and a cation polymerization type are mainly known.
- an acrylic resin since it is affected by the inhibition of curing by oxygen, it is necessary to devise purging with an inert gas such as nitrogen.
- an inert gas such as nitrogen.
- the acrylic resin has a very large shrinkage due to curing (about 10%), it cannot be molded into a desired fine shape, and the surface is uneven.
- epoxy resin since epoxy resin has a small shrinkage due to curing (about 2 to 3%), it can be neatly molded even in a fine shape.
- many of the monomers of the epoxy resin (Ames positive) have high skin sensitization, and the current situation is that the environment in which they can be used is restricted at a high rate.
- a main object of the present invention is to provide a wafer lens using an epoxy resin and a method for manufacturing the same, and a highly safe wafer lens with reduced skin sensitization and a method for manufacturing the same. .
- a method for manufacturing a wafer lens according to the present invention includes: A wafer lens manufacturing method in which an optical member made of a first curable resin is provided on a substrate, From a master mold having a plurality of positive molding surfaces corresponding to the optical surface shape of the optical member, a sub master molding part having a plurality of negative molding surfaces corresponding to the optical surface shape is formed by the second curable resin. And forming a sub master mold by backing the sub master molding part with a sub master substrate, When the optical member is molded by filling the first curable resin between the sub-master mold and the substrate and curing the mold, As the first curable resin, an epoxy compound represented by the following general formula (A) is used.
- R 100 represents a substituent
- m0 represents an integer of 0 to 2
- r0 represents an integer of 1 to 3.
- L 0 represents an r0 + 1-valent linking group or a single bond having 1 to 15 carbon atoms, which may contain an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom in the main chain.
- the wafer lens according to the present invention It contains an epoxy compound represented by the following general formula (A).
- R 100 represents a substituent
- m0 represents an integer of 0 to 2
- r0 represents an integer of 1 to 3.
- L 0 represents an r0 + 1-valent linking group or a single bond having 1 to 15 carbon atoms, which may contain an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom in the main chain.
- the wafer lens according to the present invention is: It contains an epoxy compound represented by the following general formula (I).
- R 101 represents a substituent
- m1 represents an integer of 0 to 2
- p1 and q1 each represents 0 or 1
- r1 represents an integer of 1 to 3.
- L 1 represents an r1 + 1 valent linking group having 1 to 15 carbon atoms or a single bond which may contain an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom in the main chain.
- the wafer lens according to the present invention is: It contains an epoxy compound represented by the following general formula (II).
- R 102 represents a substituent
- m2 represents an integer of 0 to 2
- p2 and q2 each represents 0 or 1
- r2 represents an integer of 1 to 3.
- L 2 represents an r2 + 1 valent linking group or a single bond having 1 to 15 carbon atoms, which may contain an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom in the main chain.
- the wafer lens according to the present invention is: It contains at least one epoxy compound represented by the following general formulas (III) to (VI).
- R 103 represents a substituent
- m3 represents an integer of 0 to 2
- p3 represents 0 or 1.
- L 3 represents a C 1-8 divalent linking group or single bond which may contain an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom in the main chain.
- R 104 represents a substituent
- m4 represents an integer of 0 to 2
- p4 represents 0 or 1.
- L 4 represents a C 1-8 divalent linking group or single bond that may contain an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom in the main chain.
- R 105 represents a substituent
- m5 represents 1 or 2.
- the wafer lens of a preferred embodiment contains a photoacid generator that generates an acid by ultraviolet irradiation, and more preferably, the photoacid generator is a sulfonium salt compound.
- the wafer lens according to a preferred embodiment contains an oxetane compound.
- an epoxy compound (epoxy resin) having a special structure represented by the general formula (A) or the general formulas (I) to (VI) described above is used as the first curable resin, Since it contains the epoxy compound, skin sensitization can be suppressed, and a highly safe wafer lens can be produced.
- FIG. 6 is a view for explaining a manufacturing method subsequent to FIG. 5.
- It is a top view which shows schematic structure of a large diameter submaster.
- It is a top view which shows schematic structure of a normal submaster. It is drawing for demonstrating a mode that a lens part is formed in the front and back both surfaces of a glass substrate using a large diameter submaster and a normal submaster.
- the wafer lens 1 has a circular glass substrate (substrate) 3 and a plurality of lens portions (optical members) 5, and the plurality of lens portions 5 are arranged in an array on the glass substrate 3. It is an arranged configuration.
- the lens unit 5 may be formed on the surface of the glass substrate 3 or may be formed on both front and back surfaces.
- the lens unit 5 is formed of a resin 5A (first curable resin).
- As the resin 5A an epoxy curable resin can be used.
- the curable resin can be roughly classified into a photocurable resin and a thermosetting resin. Any photo-curable epoxy resin can be cured by cationic polymerization.
- the thermosetting resin can be cured by radical polymerization or cationic polymerization.
- any of the alicyclic epoxide compounds represented by the general formula (A), the general formula (I) to the general formula (VI) can be used.
- the resin 5A may be composed of one type of alicyclic epoxide compound, or may be composed of a combination of a plurality of types of alicyclic epoxide compounds.
- R 100 , R 101 , R 102 , R 103 , R 104 , R 105 , and R 106 each represent a substituent.
- the substituent include a halogen atom (eg, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, a fluorine atom, etc.), an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms (eg, a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an isopropyl group, a butyl group).
- an alkoxy group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms for example, methoxy group, ethoxy group, n-propoxy group, iso-propoxy group, n-butoxy group, tert-butoxy group, etc.
- acyl group for example, acetyl group) , Propionyl group, trifluoroacetyl group, etc.
- acyloxy group eg, acetoxy group, propionyloxy group, trifluoroacetoxy group, etc.
- alkoxycarbonyl group eg, methoxycarbonyl group, ethoxycarbonyl group, tert-butoxycarbonyl group, etc.
- alkoxycarbonyl group eg, methoxycarbonyl group, ethoxycarbonyl group, tert-butoxycarbonyl group, etc.
- an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, or an alkoxycarbonyl group is preferable.
- M5 represents 1 or 2.
- L 0 is the main chain of r0 + 1 valent connecting group or a single bond contain an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom which may having 1 to 15 carbon atoms
- the general formula (I) L 1 Is an r1 + 1 valent linking group or a single bond having 1 to 15 carbon atoms which may contain an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom in the main chain.
- L 2 contains an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom in the main chain.
- L 3 and L 4 each may contain an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom in the main chain. However, it represents a divalent linking group having a carbon number of 8 or a single bond.
- Examples of the divalent linking group which may contain an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom in the main chain include the groups listed below, and these groups and —O— group, —S— group, —CO— group, —CS A group formed by combining a plurality of groups.
- L 0 , L 1 , L 2 , L 3 and L 4 may each have a substituent.
- the substituent include a halogen atom (eg, chlorine atom, bromine atom, fluorine atom), an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms (eg, methyl group, ethyl group, propyl group, isopropyl group, butyl group, etc.) ), An alkoxy group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms (for example, methoxy group, ethoxy group, n-propoxy group, iso-propoxy group, n-butoxy group, tert-butoxy group, etc.), acyl group (for example, acetyl group, Propionyl group, trifluoroacetyl group, etc.), acyloxy group (eg, acetoxy group, propionyloxy group, trifluoroacetoxy group, etc.), alkoxycarbonyl group (eg, methoxycarbonyl group
- L 0 , L 1 and L 2 are preferably divalent linking groups having 1 to 8 carbon atoms which may contain an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom in the main chain, or L 0 , L 1 , L 2 , L 3 , L 4 is more preferably a divalent linking group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms each having a main chain composed of only carbon.
- P1 and q1 each represents 0 or 1, and p1 + q1 is preferably 1 or more.
- p2 and q2 each represents 0 or 1, each preferably 1;
- p3 and p4 each represents 0 or 1.
- a value obtained by dividing the molecular weight by the total number of epoxy groups in the molecule is preferably 160 or more and 300 or less.
- reaction solution was diluted with 1 L of toluene, heated to 50 ° C. under reduced pressure using a water aspirator, and the low-boiling components were distilled off and removed until the distillate disappeared.
- the remaining reaction composition was distilled under reduced pressure to obtain the target exemplified compound EP-9.
- the yield was 78%.
- reaction solution was diluted with 1 L of toluene, heated to 50 ° C. under reduced pressure using a water aspirator, and the low-boiling components were distilled off and removed until the distillate disappeared.
- the remaining reaction composition was distilled under reduced pressure to obtain the target exemplified compound EP-12.
- the yield was 75%.
- reaction solution was diluted with 1 L of toluene, heated to 50 ° C. under reduced pressure using a water aspirator, and the low-boiling components were distilled off and removed until the distillate disappeared.
- the remaining reaction composition was distilled under reduced pressure to obtain the target exemplified compound EP-17.
- the yield was 70%.
- the reaction is performed under the reaction conditions according to the conditions described in the literature (J. Amer. Chem. Soc., 119, 15, 1997, 3507-3512, Tetrahedron Lett., 40, 32, 1999, 5817-5822).
- the target compound was obtained in a high yield.
- 4-methyl-3-cyclohexenyl methanol was synthesized in high yield by reducing this compound.
- reaction solution was diluted with 1 L of toluene, heated to 50 ° C. under reduced pressure using a water aspirator, and the low-boiling components were distilled off and removed until the distillate disappeared.
- reaction solution was diluted with 1 L of toluene, heated to 50 ° C. under reduced pressure using a water aspirator, and low-boiling components were distilled off and removed until the distillate disappeared.
- the alicyclic epoxide compounds represented by the general formula (A) and the general formulas (I) to (VI) may contain (add) a photoacid generator that generates an acid upon irradiation with ultraviolet rays. preferable.
- photoacid generator for example, a chemical amplification type photoresist or a compound used for photocationic polymerization is used (Organic Materials Research Group, “Organic Material for Imaging”, Bunshin Publishing (1993), See pages 187-192). Examples of compounds suitable for the present invention are listed below.
- SO 3 - salt, CF 3 SO 3 - and sulfonic acid salts such as salts.
- a halide that generates hydrogen halide can also be used.
- Specific compounds are exemplified below.
- Examples of the photoacid generator used in the present invention include arylsulfonium salt derivatives (for example, Cyracure UVI-6990, Cyracure UVI-6974, manufactured by Union Carbide, Adekaoptomer SP-150, Adekaopter, manufactured by Asahi Denka Kogyo Co., Ltd. Merp SP-152, Adekaoptomer SP-170, Adekaoptomer SP-172), allyl iodonium salt derivatives (for example, RP-2074 manufactured by Rhodia), allene-ion complex derivatives (for example, Irgacure 261 manufactured by Ciba Geigy) ), Acid generators such as diazonium salt derivatives, triazine initiators and other halides.
- arylsulfonium salt derivatives for example, Cyracure UVI-6990, Cyracure UVI-6974, manufactured by Union Carbide, Adekaoptomer SP-150, Adekaopter, manufactured by Asahi Denka
- the photoacid generator is preferably contained in a ratio of 0.2 to 20 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the compound having cationic polymerizability.
- the content of the photoacid generator is less than 0.2 parts by mass, it is difficult to obtain a cured product, and even if the content exceeds 20 parts by mass, there is no further effect of improving curability.
- These photoacid generators can be used alone or in combination of two or more.
- Preferred as the photoacid generator used in the present invention are onium salts such as sulfonium salts, iodonium salts, ammonium salts, phosphonium salts, etc. Among them, sulfonium salt compounds are preferred.
- More preferable sulfonium salt compounds include sulfonium salts represented by the following general formulas (I-1), (I-2), and (I-3).
- R 11 , R 12 , and R 13 represent substituents, and m, n, and p represent integers of 0 to 2.
- X 11 ⁇ represents a counter ion.
- R 14 represents a substituent
- q represents an integer of 0 to 2.
- R 15 and R 16 each represents a substituted, unsubstituted alkyl group, a substituted, unsubstituted alkenyl group, a substituted, unsubstituted alkynyl group, or a substituted, unsubstituted aryl group.
- X 12 ⁇ represents a counter ion.
- R 17 represents a substituent
- r represents an integer of 0 to 3.
- R 18 represents a hydrogen atom or a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group
- R 19 and R 20 represent a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group, a substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group, a substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group, or a substituted or unsubstituted group.
- X 13 - is a counter ion.
- R 11 , R 12 and R 13 each represent a substituent.
- the substituent include a halogen atom (eg, chlorine atom, bromine atom, fluorine atom), an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms (eg, methyl group, ethyl group, propyl group, isopropyl group, butyl group, etc.) ), A cycloalkyl group having 3 to 6 carbon atoms (for example, cyclopropyl group, cyclobutyl group, cyclopentyl group, cyclohexyl group, etc.), an alkenyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms (for example, vinyl group, 1-propenyl group, 2-propenyl group, 2-butenyl group, etc.), alkynyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms
- substituents include a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkyloxy group, an aryl group, an aryloxy group, an arylthio group, and an acyl group. Of these substituents, possible ones may be further substituted.
- m, n and p each represents an integer of 0 to 2, and each is preferably 1 or more.
- X 11 - is a counter anion.
- Counter anions include complex ions such as BF 4 ⁇ , B (C 6 F 5 ) 4 ⁇ , PF 6 ⁇ , AsF 6 ⁇ , SbF 6 — , p-CH 3 C 6 H 4 SO 3 ⁇ , CF 3 SO 3 - can be given sulfonate ion such.
- As the counter anion borate ion and PF 6 - are preferable because of their high acid generation ability.
- R 14 represents a substituent.
- the substituent include a halogen atom (for example, chlorine atom, bromine atom, fluorine atom, etc.) and an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms (for example, methyl group, ethyl group, propyl group, isopropyl group, butyl group, etc.)
- a cycloalkyl group having 3 to 6 carbon atoms for example, a cyclopropyl group, a cyclobutyl group, a cyclopentyl group, a cyclohexyl group, etc.
- an alkenyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms for example, a vinyl group, a 1-propenyl group, 2 -Propenyl group, 2-butenyl group, etc.
- alkynyl groups having 1 to 6 carbon atoms for example, acetylenyl group, 1-propynyl group, 2-propyn
- q represents an integer of 0 to 2, preferably 1 or more, and more preferably 2.
- R 15 and R 16 represent a substituted, unsubstituted alkyl group, a substituted, unsubstituted alkenyl group, a substituted, unsubstituted alkynyl group, or a substituted, unsubstituted aryl group.
- substituents examples include a halogen atom (eg, chlorine atom, bromine atom, fluorine atom), an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms (eg, methyl group, ethyl group, propyl group, isopropyl group, butyl group, etc.) ), A cycloalkyl group having 3 to 6 carbon atoms (for example, cyclopropyl group, cyclobutyl group, cyclopentyl group, cyclohexyl group, etc.), an alkenyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms (for example, vinyl group, 1-propenyl group, 2-propenyl group, 2-butenyl group, etc.), alkynyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms (for example, acetylenyl group, 1-propynyl group, 2-propynyl group, 2-butynyl group, etc.), 1 to 6 carbon atoms Alkoxy groups (for example, meth
- R 15 and R 16 are preferably a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group or a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group, and the substituent is preferably a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an aryl group, an aryloxy group, An acyl group and a hydroxyl group.
- X 12 - is a counter anion.
- Counter anions include complex ions such as BF 4 ⁇ , B (C 6 F 5 ) 4 ⁇ , PF 6 ⁇ , AsF 6 ⁇ , SbF 6 — , p-CH 3 C 6 H 4 SO 3 ⁇ , CF 3 SO 3 - can be given sulfonate ion such.
- As the counter anion borate ion and PF 6 - are preferable because of their high acid generation ability.
- R 17 represents a substituent.
- substituents include a halogen atom (eg, chlorine atom, bromine atom, fluorine atom), an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms (eg, methyl group, ethyl group, propyl group, isopropyl group, butyl group, etc.) ), A cycloalkyl group having 3 to 6 carbon atoms (for example, cyclopropyl group, cyclobutyl group, cyclopentyl group, cyclohexyl group, etc.), an alkenyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms (for example, vinyl group, 1-propenyl group, 2-propenyl group, 2-butenyl group, etc.), alkynyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms (for example, acetylenyl group, 1-propynyl group, 2-propynyl group, 2-butynyl group, etc.), 1
- R 18 represents a hydrogen atom or a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group
- R 19 and R 20 represent a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group, a substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group, a substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group, or a substituted or unsubstituted group.
- substituents examples include a halogen atom (eg, chlorine atom, bromine atom, fluorine atom), an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms (eg, methyl group, ethyl group, propyl group, isopropyl group, butyl group, etc.) ), A cycloalkyl group having 3 to 6 carbon atoms (for example, cyclopropyl group, cyclobutyl group, cyclopentyl group, cyclohexyl group, etc.), an alkenyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms (for example, vinyl group, 1-propenyl group, 2-propenyl group, 2-butenyl group, etc.), alkynyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms (for example, acetylenyl group, 1-propynyl group, 2-propynyl group, 2-butynyl group, etc.), 1 to 6 carbon atoms Alkoxy groups (for example, meth
- R 18 is preferably a hydrogen atom or an unsubstituted lower alkyl group (methyl group, ethyl group, propyl group), and R 19 and R 20 are preferably a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group, or a substituted or unsubstituted group.
- the substituent is preferably a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an aryl group, an aryloxy group, or an acyl group.
- X 13 - is a counter anion.
- Counter anions include complex ions such as BF 4 ⁇ , B (C 6 F 5 ) 4 ⁇ , PF 6 ⁇ , AsF 6 ⁇ , SbF 6 — , p-CH 3 C 6 H 4 SO 3 ⁇ , CF 3 SO 3 - can be given sulfonate ion such.
- As the counter anion borate ion and PF 6 - are preferable because of their high acid generation ability.
- photopolymerization accelerator examples include anthracene, anthracene derivatives (for example, Adekaoptomer SP-100 manufactured by Asahi Denka Kogyo Co., Ltd.), phenothiazine (10H-phenothiazine), phenothiazine derivatives (for example, 10-methylphenothiazine, 10-ethylphenothiazine, 10-decylphenothiazine, 10-acetylphenothiazine, 10-decylphenothiazine-5-oxide, 10-decylphenothiazine-5,5-dioxide, 10-acetylphenothiazine-5,5-dioxide). These photopolymerization accelerators can be used alone or in combination.
- the alicyclic epoxide compound represented by the general formula (A), general formula (I) to general formula (VI) preferably contains (adds) an oxetane compound.
- oxetane compound a conventionally known oxetane compound can be used, and in particular, when an oxetane compound not substituted at the 2-position is used in combination, a sensitivity improving effect or a cured film property improving effect can be obtained. .
- An example of an oxetane compound in which the 2-position is not substituted is a compound represented by the following general formula (101).
- R 1 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms such as a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, or a butyl group, a fluoroalkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, an allyl group, or an aryl group. , Furyl group or thienyl group.
- R 2 represents an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms such as a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, or a butyl group, a 1-propenyl group, a 2-propenyl group, a 2-methyl-1-propenyl group, or 2-methyl-2.
- -Alkenyl groups having 2 to 6 carbon atoms such as propenyl group, 1-butenyl group, 2-butenyl group and 3-butenyl group, fragrances such as phenyl group, benzyl group, fluorobenzyl group, methoxybenzyl group and phenoxyethyl group A group having a ring, an alkylcarbonyl group having 2 to 6 carbon atoms such as an ethylcarbonyl group, a propylcarbonyl group and a butylcarbonyl group, an alkoxy having 2 to 6 carbon atoms such as an ethoxycarbonyl group, a propoxycarbonyl group and a butoxycarbonyl group Carbonyl group, ethylcarbamoyl group, propylcarbamoyl group, butylcarbamoyl group, pentylcarbamoyl group An N-alkylcarbamoyl group having 2 to 6 carbon atom
- Examples of the compound having two oxetane rings include a compound represented by the following general formula (102).
- R 1 is the same group as that in General Formula (101).
- R 3 is, for example, a linear or branched poly (alkyleneoxy) group such as a linear or branched alkylene group such as an ethylene group, a propylene group or a butylene group, a poly (ethyleneoxy) group or a poly (propyleneoxy) group.
- R 3 is, for example, a linear or branched poly (alkyleneoxy) group such as a linear or branched alkylene group such as an ethylene group, a propylene group or a butylene group, a poly (ethyleneoxy) group or a poly (propyleneoxy) group.
- the following general formula (103) can also include polyvalent group selected from groups represented by (104) and (105).
- R 4 is a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms such as a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, or a butyl group, or a carbon such as a methoxy group, an ethoxy group, a propoxy group, or a butoxy group.
- a C 1-4 alkoxy group, a halogen atom such as a chlorine atom or a bromine atom, a nitro group, a cyano group, a mercapto group, a lower alkyl carboxyl group, a carboxyl group, or a carbamoyl group.
- R 5 represents an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, a methylene group, NH, SO, SO 2 , C (CF 3 ) 2 , or C (CH 3 ) 2 .
- R 6 is an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms such as a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, or a butyl group, or an aryl group.
- n is an integer of 0 to 2000.
- R 7 is a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, a butyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, or an aryl group.
- R 7 can also include a group selected from the group represented by the following general formula (106).
- R 8 is an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms such as a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, or a butyl group, or an aryl group.
- m is an integer from 0 to 100.
- the exemplified compound 11 is a compound in which R 1 is an ethyl group and R 3 is a carboxyl group in the general formula (102).
- the exemplified compound 12 is a compound in which, in the general formula (102), R 1 is an ethyl group, R 3 is the general formula (105), R 6 and R 7 are methyl groups, and n is 1.
- a preferred example other than the above compound is a compound represented by the following general formula (107).
- R 1 has the same meaning as R 1 in the general formula (101).
- An example of a compound having 3 to 4 oxetane rings is a compound represented by the following general formula (108).
- R 1 has the same meaning as R 1 in the general formula (101).
- R 9 for example, a branched alkylene group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms such as groups represented by the following A to C, a branched poly (alkyleneoxy) group such as a group represented by the following D, or the following E And branched polysiloxy groups such as those shown.
- j is 3 or 4.
- R 10 is a lower alkyl group such as a methyl group, an ethyl group or a propyl group.
- p is an integer of 1 to 10.
- Example compound 13 is an example of a compound having 3 to 4 oxetane rings.
- examples of compounds having 1 to 4 oxetane rings other than those described above include compounds represented by the following general formula (109).
- R 8 has the same meaning as R 8 in the general formula (106).
- R 11 is an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms such as a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group or a butyl group, or a trialkylsilyl group, and r is 1 to 4.
- Preferred examples of the oxetane compound used in the present invention include the following compounds.
- each compound having an oxetane ring described above is not particularly limited, and may be a conventionally known method, for example, Pattisson (DB Pattison, J. Am. Chem. Soc., 3455, 79). (1957)) discloses a method for synthesizing an oxetane ring from a diol.
- Pattisson DB Pattison, J. Am. Chem. Soc., 3455, 79. (1957) discloses a method for synthesizing an oxetane ring from a diol.
- compounds having 1 to 4 oxetane rings having a high molecular weight of about 1000 to 5000 are also exemplified. Examples of these specific compounds include the following compounds.
- the resin 5A as described above includes an alicyclic epoxide compound represented by the general formula (A), the general formula (I) to the general formula (VI), a photoacid generator that generates an acid by ultraviolet irradiation, and oxetane.
- an alicyclic epoxide compound represented by the general formula (A), the general formula (I) to the general formula (VI), a photoacid generator that generates an acid by ultraviolet irradiation, and oxetane may be contained.
- An example of the additive is a color material.
- a color material a color material that can be dissolved or dispersed in the main component of the polymerizable compound can be used, but a pigment is preferable from the viewpoint of weather resistance.
- a master mold (hereinafter simply referred to as “master”) 10 and a sub master mold (hereinafter simply referred to as “submaster”) 20 shown in FIG. 2 are used as molds for molding. Is done.
- the master 10 has a plurality of convex portions 14 formed in an array with respect to a rectangular parallelepiped base portion 12.
- the convex portion 14 is a portion corresponding to the lens portion 5 of the wafer lens 1 and protrudes from the base portion 12 in a substantially hemispherical shape.
- the optical surface shape (surface shape) of the master 10 may have a convex shape in which convex portions 14 are formed as shown in FIG. 2, or a plurality of concave portions 16 are formed as shown in FIG. You may have a concave shape.
- the surface (molding surface) shape of these convex portions 14 and concave portions 16 is positive corresponding to the optical surface shape (the shape of the surface opposite to the glass substrate 3) of the lens portion 5 molded and transferred onto the glass substrate 3. It has a shape.
- the master 10 in FIG. 2 is distinguished as “master 10A”
- the master 10 in FIG. 4 is distinguished as “master 10B”.
- metal or metal glass can be used as the molding material of the master 10A.
- the classification includes ferrous materials and other alloys.
- the iron system include hot dies, cold dies, plastic dies, high-speed tool steel, general structural rolled steel, carbon steel for mechanical structure, chromium / molybdenum steel, and stainless steel.
- plastic molds include pre-hardened steel, quenched and tempered steel, and aging treated steel.
- pre-hardened steel include SC, SCM, and SUS. More specifically, the SC system is PXZ.
- SCM systems include HPM2, HPM7, PX5, and IMPAX.
- Examples of the SUS system include HPM38, HPM77, S-STAR, G-STAR, STAVAX, RAMAX-S, and PSL.
- Examples of the iron-based alloy include JP-A-2005-113161 and JP-A-2005-206913.
- As the non-ferrous alloys copper alloys, aluminum alloys and zinc alloys are well known. Examples thereof include alloys disclosed in JP-A-10-219373 and JP-A-2000-176970.
- glass can be used as a molding material for the master 10A. If glass is used for master 10A, the merit of letting UV light pass is also obtained. If it is the glass generally used, it will not specifically limit.
- the molding material of the master 10A there can be mentioned materials that can easily ensure fluidity at a low temperature, such as low melting point glass and metallic glass.
- Use of the low melting point glass is advantageous because it enables irradiation from the mold side of the sample when molding a UV curable material.
- the low melting point glass include glass having a glass transition point of about 600 ° C. or lower and a glass composition of ZnO—PbO— B2O3, PbO—SiO2—B2O3, PbO—P2O5-SnF2, and the like.
- Examples of the glass that melts at 400 ° C. or less include PbF2-SnF2-SnO—P2O5 and similar structures.
- Specific materials include S-FPL51, S-FPL53, S-FSL-5, S-BSL-7, S-BSM-2, S-BSM-4, S-BSM-9, S-BSM10, S-BSM14, S-BSM15 , S-BSM16, S-BSM18, S-BSM22, S-BSM25, S-BSM28, S-BSM71, S-BSM81, S-NSL 3, S-NSL 5, S-NSL36, S-BAL 2, S- BAL 3, S-BAL11, S-BAL12, S-BAL14, S-BAL35, S-BAL41, S-BAL42, S-BAM 3, S-BAM 4, S-BAM12, S-BAH10, S-BAH11, S -BAH27, S-BAH28, S-BAH32, S-PHM52, S-PHM53, S-TIL 1, S-TIL 2, S-TIL 6, S-TIL25, S-TIL26,
- metallic glass can be easily formed by molding as well.
- the metal glass has a structure such as JP-A-8-109419, JP-A-8-333660, JP-A-10-81944, JP-A-10-92619, JP-A-2001-140047, JP-A-2001-303218, and JP-T-2003-534925. Although mentioned, it is not necessary to specifically limit to these.
- the optical surface of the master 10A may be a surface on which a single convex portion 14 is formed, or may be a surface on which a plurality of convex portions 14 are formed in an array as shown in FIG.
- a method for creating the optical surface of the master 10A there is diamond cutting.
- the optical surface of the master 10A is a surface on which a single convex portion 14 is formed, it is realized by turning with a diamond tool using a material such as nickel phosphorus, aluminum alloy or free-cutting true casting as a mold material. it can.
- the shape of the optical surface is cut using a ball end mill having a cutting edge made of diamond.
- the cutting edge of the tool is not a complete arc, and an error occurs in the machining shape depending on the location where the cutting edge is used. Therefore, when cutting any part of the optical surface shape, the position of the cutting edge used is the same. Thus, it is desirable to work while adjusting the tilt of the tool.
- the processing machine needs at least 3 translational degrees of freedom and 2 rotational degrees of freedom, and can only be realized by a processing machine having a total of 5 or more degrees of freedom, so the optical surface of the master 10A is formed. In this case, a processing machine having 5 or more degrees of freedom is used.
- the sub master 20 includes a sub master molding portion 22 and a sub master substrate 26.
- a plurality of concave portions 24 are formed in the sub master molding portion 22 in an array.
- the surface (molding surface) shape of the recess 24 is a negative shape corresponding to the lens portion 5 in the wafer lens 1, and is recessed in a substantially hemispherical shape in FIG. 2.
- the sub master molding part 22 is formed of a resin 22A (second curable resin).
- a resin having good releasability, particularly a transparent resin is preferable. It is excellent in that it can be released without applying a release agent.
- the resin any of a photo-curing resin, a thermosetting resin, and a thermoplastic resin may be used.
- the photo-curable resin examples include a fluorine-based resin
- examples of the thermosetting resin include a fluorine-based resin and a silicone-based resin.
- a resin having good releasability that is, a resin having a low surface energy when cured is preferable.
- examples of the thermoplastic resin include transparent and relatively good releasable olefin resins such as polycarbonate and cycloolefin polymer.
- the release property is improved in the order of fluorine resin, silicone resin, and olefin resin.
- the sub master substrate 26 may be omitted. By using such a resin, it can be bent, so that it becomes more advantageous at the time of mold release.
- fluorine resin As fluororesin, PTFE (polytetrafluoroethylene), PFA (tetrafluoroethylene / perfluoroalkyl vinyl ether copolymer), FEP (tetrafluoroethylene / hexafluoropropylene copolymer (4,6 fluorinated)), ETFE (tetrafluoroethylene / ethylene copolymer), PVDF (polyvinylidene fluoride (difluoride)), PCTFE (polychlorotrifluoroethylene (trifluoride)), ECTFE (chlorotrifluoroethylene / ethylene copolymer) ), PVF (polyvinyl fluoride) and the like.
- PTFE polytetrafluoroethylene
- PFA tetrafluoroethylene / perfluoroalkyl vinyl ether copolymer
- FEP tetrafluoroethylene / hexafluoropropylene copolymer
- Fluorine-based resin has advantages such as releasability, heat resistance, chemical resistance, insulation, and low friction, but the disadvantage is that it is inferior in transparency because it is crystalline. Since the melting point is high, a high temperature (about 300 ° C.) is required during molding.
- the molding method is injection molding, extrusion molding, blow molding, transfer molding, etc.
- FEP, PFA, PVDF, etc. which are excellent in light transmittance and can be injection molding and extrusion molding, are particularly preferable.
- melt moldable grades examples include Asahi Glass Fluon PFA, Sumitomo 3M Dyneon PFA, Dyneon THV, and the like.
- the Dyneon THV series is preferable because it has a low melting point (about 120 ° C.) and can be molded at a relatively low temperature and is highly transparent.
- Silicone resins include one-part moisture curing type and two-part addition reaction type and two-part condensation type.
- Advantages include releasability, flexibility, heat resistance, flame resistance, moisture permeability, low water absorption, and many transparent grades, but disadvantages include large linear expansion.
- a silicone resin for mold making that contains a PDMS (polydimethylsiloxane) structure is preferable because of good release properties, and a highly transparent grade of RTV elastomer is desirable.
- PDMS polydimethylsiloxane
- RTV elastomer elastomer
- the molding method is room temperature curing or heat curing.
- thermoplastic resin examples include transparent resins such as alicyclic hydrocarbon resins, acrylic resins, polycarbonate resins, polyester resins, polyether resins, polyamide resins, and polyimide resins.
- a hydrocarbon-based resin is preferably used. If the submaster 20 is made of a thermoplastic resin, the injection molding technique that has been conventionally performed can be used as it is, and the submaster 20 can be easily manufactured. If the thermoplastic resin is an alicyclic hydrocarbon-based resin, the hygroscopic property is low, so the life of the submaster 20 is extended.
- cycloaliphatic hydrocarbon resins such as cycloolefin resins are excellent in light resistance and light transmittance
- light having a short wavelength such as a UV light source may be used. There is little deterioration and it can be used as a mold for a long time.
- Examples of the alicyclic hydrocarbon-based resin include those represented by the following formula (1).
- “x” and “y” represent copolymerization ratios and are real numbers satisfying 0/100 ⁇ y / x ⁇ 95/5.
- “N” is 0, 1 or 2, and represents the number of substitutions of the substituent Q.
- “R 1 ” is one or more (2 + n) -valent groups selected from a hydrocarbon group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms.
- “R 2 ” is a hydrogen atom or a monovalent group of one or more selected from the group consisting of carbon and hydrogen and having 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
- “R 3 ” is one or two or more divalent groups selected from a hydrocarbon group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms.
- Q is COOR 4 (R 4 is a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon, and is one or more monovalent groups selected from a structural group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms). It is 1 type or 2 or more types of monovalent group chosen from the structural group made.
- R 1 is preferably one or more divalent groups selected from the group of hydrocarbon groups having 2 to 12 carbon atoms, more preferably the following formula (2) (formula ( In 2), p is an integer of 0 to 2.);
- R 1 may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
- R 2 include a hydrogen atom, a methyl group, an ethyl group, an n-propyl group, an i-propyl group, an n-butyl group, and a 2-methylpropyl group, preferably a hydrogen atom and / or Or a methyl group, and most preferably a hydrogen atom.
- Etc. N is preferably 0.
- the type of copolymerization is not particularly limited, and known copolymerization types such as random copolymerization, block copolymerization, and alternating copolymerization can be applied, but random copolymerization is preferable. is there.
- the polymer used in the present embodiment has a repeating structural unit derived from another copolymerizable monomer as required, as long as the physical properties of the product obtained by the molding method of the present embodiment are not impaired. You may do it.
- the copolymerization ratio is not particularly limited, but is preferably 20 mol% or less, more preferably 10 mol% or less.
- the optical characteristics are impaired and a high-precision optical component is obtained. May not be obtained.
- the type of copolymerization at this time is not particularly limited, but random copolymerization is preferred.
- the repeating unit having an alicyclic structure has an alicyclic structure represented by the following formula (4).
- the total content of the repeating unit (a) and the repeating unit (b) having a chain structure represented by the following formula (5) and / or the following formula (6) and / or the following formula (7) is 90 mass.
- examples thereof include a polymer that is contained so as to be at least% and the content of the repeating unit (b) is 1% by mass or more and less than 10% by mass.
- R21 to R33 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, a chain hydrocarbon group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a hydroxy group, an ether group, Chains substituted with ester groups, cyano groups, amino groups, imide groups, silyl groups, and polar groups (halogen atoms, alkoxy groups, hydroxy groups, ester groups, cyano groups, amide groups, imide groups, or silyl groups) Represents a hydrocarbon group or the like.
- the halogen atom include a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, and an iodine atom.
- Examples of the chain hydrocarbon group substituted with a polar group include, for example, 1 to 20 carbon atoms, preferably Examples thereof include 1 to 10, more preferably 1 to 6 halogenated alkyl groups.
- As the chain hydrocarbon group for example, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms: 2 to 20 carbon atoms, preferably 2 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 6 carbon atoms. 6 alkenyl groups.
- X in the formula (4) represents an alicyclic hydrocarbon group, and the number of carbon atoms constituting the group is usually 4 to 20, preferably 4 to 10, more preferably 5 to 7. is there. Birefringence can be reduced by setting the number of carbon atoms constituting the alicyclic structure within this range.
- the alicyclic structure is not limited to a monocyclic structure, and may be a polycyclic structure such as a norbornane ring.
- the alicyclic hydrocarbon group may have a carbon-carbon unsaturated bond, but the content thereof is 10% or less, preferably 5% or less, more preferably 3% or less of the total carbon-carbon bonds. is there. By setting the carbon-carbon unsaturated bond of the alicyclic hydrocarbon group within this range, transparency and heat resistance are improved.
- the carbon constituting the alicyclic hydrocarbon group includes a hydrogen atom, hydrocarbon group, halogen atom, alkoxy group, hydroxy group, ester group, cyano group, amide group, imide group, silyl group, and polar group ( A chain hydrocarbon group substituted with a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a hydroxy group, an ester group, a cyano group, an amide group, an imide group, or a silyl group) may be bonded, Among these, a hydrogen atom or a chain hydrocarbon group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms is preferable in terms of heat resistance and low water absorption.
- formula (6) has a carbon-carbon unsaturated bond in the main chain
- formula (7) has a carbon-carbon saturated bond in the main chain.
- the content of unsaturated bonds is usually 10% or less, preferably 5% or less, more preferably 3% or less, of all carbon-carbon bonds constituting the main chain.
- / or the total content of the chain-structured repeating unit (b) represented by the general formula (7) is usually 90% or more, preferably 95% or more, more preferably 97% or more, on a mass basis. is there.
- an aromatic vinyl compound is copolymerized with another monomer that can be copolymerized, and a carbon-carbon unsaturated bond of the main chain and the aromatic ring is formed.
- the method of hydrogenating is mentioned.
- the molecular weight of the copolymer before hydrogenation is 1,000 to 1,000,000, preferably 5,000 to 500,000 in terms of polystyrene (or polyisoprene) equivalent weight average molecular weight (Mw) measured by GPC. More preferably, it is in the range of 10,000 to 300,000.
- Mw mass average molecular weight
- aromatic vinyl compound used in the above method include, for example, styrene, ⁇ -methylstyrene, ⁇ -ethylstyrene, ⁇ -propylstyrene, ⁇ -isopropylstyrene, ⁇ -t-butylstyrene, 2- Methylstyrene, 3-methylstyrene, 4-methylstyrene, 2,4-diisopropylstyrene, 2,4-dimethylstyrene, 4-t-butylstyrene, 5-t-butyl-2-methylstyrene, monochlorostyrene, dichlorostyrene Monofluorostyrene, 4-phenylstyrene and the like, and styrene, 2-methylstyrene, 3-methylstyrene, 4-methylstyrene and the like are preferable.
- aromatic vinyl compounds can be used alone or in combination of two
- Other monomers that can be copolymerized are not particularly limited, but chain vinyl compounds and chain conjugated diene compounds are used. When chain conjugated dienes are used, the operability in the production process is excellent. The resulting alicyclic hydrocarbon copolymer is excellent in strength properties.
- chain vinyl compound examples include chain olefin monomers such as ethylene, propylene, 1-butene, 1-pentene and 4-methyl-1-pentene; 1-cyanoethylene (acrylonitrile), 1-cyano- Nitrile monomers such as 1-methylethylene (methacrylonitrile) and 1-cyano-1-chloroethylene ( ⁇ -chloroacrylonitrile); 1- (methoxycarbonyl) -1-methylethylene (methacrylic acid methyl ester), 1- (Ethoxycarbonyl) -1-methylethylene (methacrylic acid ethyl ester), 1- (propoxycarbonyl) -1-methylethylene (methacrylic acid propyl ester), 1- (butoxycarbonyl) -1-methylethylene (methacrylic) Acid butyl ester), 1-methoxycarbo (Meth) acrylic acid such as ruethylene (acrylic acid methyl ester), 1-ethoxycarbonylethylene (acrylic acid ethyl ester), 1-propoxycarbonylethylene (acryl
- chain conjugated diene examples include 1,3-butadiene, isoprene, 2,3-dimethyl-1,3-butadiene, 1,3-pentadiene, 1,3-hexadiene, and the like.
- chain vinyl compounds and chain conjugated dienes chain conjugated dienes are preferable, and butadiene and isoprene are particularly preferable.
- These chain vinyl compounds and chain conjugated dienes can be used alone or in combination of two or more.
- the polymerization reaction is not particularly limited, such as radical polymerization, anionic polymerization, and cationic polymerization.
- the polymerization operation, the ease of the hydrogenation reaction in the post-process, and the mechanical properties of the finally obtained hydrocarbon copolymer are not limited.
- the anionic polymerization method is preferable.
- anionic polymerization bulk polymerization, solution polymerization, slurry polymerization, etc. in the temperature range of usually 0 ° C. to 200 ° C., preferably 20 ° C. to 100 ° C., particularly preferably 20 ° C. to 80 ° C. in the presence of an initiator.
- solution polymerization is preferable in view of removal of reaction heat.
- an inert solvent capable of dissolving the polymer and its hydride is used.
- Examples of the inert solvent used in the solution reaction include aliphatic hydrocarbons such as n-butane, n-pentane, iso-pentane, n-hexane, n-heptane, and iso-octane; cyclopentane, cyclohexane, methylcyclopentane, Examples thereof include alicyclic hydrocarbons such as methylcyclohexane and decalin; aromatic hydrocarbons such as benzene and toluene.
- Examples of the initiator for anionic polymerization include monoorganolithium such as n-butyllithium, sec-butyllithium, t-butyllithium, hexyllithium, and phenyllithium, dilithiomethane, 1,4-diobtan, 1,4-dilithiol.
- a polyfunctional organolithium compound such as 2-ethylcyclohexane can be used.
- the reaction method and reaction form are special. There is no particular limitation, and it may be carried out according to a known method, but a hydrogenation method that can increase the hydrogenation rate and has little polymer chain scission reaction that occurs simultaneously with the hydrogenation reaction is preferable, for example, in an organic solvent, nickel,
- the method is performed using a catalyst containing at least one metal selected from cobalt, iron, titanium, rhodium, palladium, platinum, ruthenium, and rhenium.
- the hydrogenation reaction is usually from 10 ° C.
- the hydrogen pressure is usually 0.1 MPa to 30 MPa, but in addition to the above reasons, it is preferably 1 MPa to 20 MPa, more preferably 2 MPa to 10 MPa from the viewpoint of operability.
- the hydrogenation rate of the hydride obtained in this way is determined by 1 H-NMR as measured by the main chain carbon-carbon unsaturated bond, aromatic ring carbon-carbon double bond, unsaturated ring carbon- All of the carbon double bonds are usually 90% or more, preferably 95% or more, more preferably 97% or more. When the hydrogenation rate is low, the low birefringence, thermal stability, etc. of the resulting copolymer are lowered.
- the method for recovering the hydride after completion of the hydrogenation reaction is not particularly limited. Usually, after removing the hydrogenation catalyst residue by a method such as filtration or centrifugation, the solvent is removed directly from the hydride solution by drying, the hydride solution is poured into a poor solvent for the hydride, and the hydride A method of coagulating can be used.
- the sub-master substrate 26 may be any material that can produce high smoothness, such as quartz, silicone wafer, metal, glass, and resin.
- a transparent mold such as quartz, glass, or transparent resin
- the transparent resin may be any of a thermoplastic resin, a thermosetting resin, and a UV curable resin, and may have an effect of reducing the linear expansion coefficient by adding fine particles to the resin.
- a resin in this way, it is easier to release when it is released because it bends than glass.
- the resin has a large coefficient of linear expansion, the shape is deformed when heat is generated during UV irradiation. It may not be possible to transfer clearly. Therefore, such a problem can also be avoided by using resin as the backing material.
- a glass material may be used from the viewpoint of strength.
- the difference in linear expansion coefficient is preferably 3 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 5 / K or less.
- a resin 22A is applied on the master 10A, the convex portions 14 of the master 10A are transferred to the resin 22A, the resin 22A is cured, and a plurality of concave portions 24 are formed on the resin 22A. Thereby, the sub master molding part 22 is formed.
- the resin 22A may be thermosetting, photocurable, or volatile curable (HSQ (hydrogensilsesquioxane or the like) that is cured by volatilization of the solvent).
- HSQ hydrogensilsesquioxane or the like
- molding with UV curable or volatile curable resin, which is less affected by thermal expansion of resin 22A is preferable because it does not apply heat to curing, but is not limited thereto. Since the resin 22A having good releasability from the master 10A after curing does not require a large force at the time of peeling, the molded optical surface shape and the like are more preferable without being inadvertently deformed.
- the optical surface shape (convex part 14) of the master 10A is preferably cure shrinkage of the resin 22A. And designed in anticipation of cure shrinkage of resin 5A.
- the resin 22A When the resin 22A is applied on the master 10A, a technique such as spray coating or spin coating is used. In this case, the resin 22A may be applied while evacuating. If the resin 22A is applied while evacuating, the resin 22A can be cured without introducing bubbles into the resin 22A.
- the surface of the master 10A is modified. Specifically, an OH group is made to stand on the surface of the master 10A.
- the method for modifying the surface may be any method as long as OH groups are set on the surface of the master 10A, such as UV ozone cleaning and oxygen plasma ashing.
- a material having a hydrolyzable functional group bonded to the end such as a silane coupling agent structure, that is, dehydration condensation or hydrogen bonding with an OH group present on the metal surface is caused. And those having a structure that binds to each other.
- a release agent having a silane coupling structure at the end and a release function at the other end the more OH groups are formed on the surface of the master 10A, the more covalently bonded sites are on the surface of the master 10A. Increases and allows stronger bonds. As a result, even if the molding operation is executed a plurality of times, the durability can be improved without diminishing the releasing effect. Moreover, since a primer (underlayer, SiO 2 coat, etc.) is not required, the effect of improving the durability can be obtained while keeping the thin film.
- the material having a hydrolyzable functional group bonded to the terminal preferably includes a material composed of an alkoxysilane group, a halogenated silane group, a quaternary ammonium salt, a phosphate ester group or the like as a functional group.
- the terminal group may be a group that causes a strong bond with the mold, such as triazine thiol. Specifically, it has an alkoxysilane group (8) or a halogenated silane group (9) represented by the following general formula.
- R1 and R2 are alkyl groups (eg, methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl, etc.), n and m are 1, 2 or 3, and R3 is an alkyl group (eg, methyl, ethyl, propyl) Group, butyl group, etc.) or alkoxy group (for example, methoxy group, ethoxy group, butoxy group, etc.).
- X is a halogen atom (for example, Cl, Br, I).
- R1, R2, R3 or X when two or more of R1, R2, R3 or X are bonded to Si, they may be different within the above group or atom range, for example, so that two Rm are an alkyl group and an alkoxy group. Good.
- the alkoxysilane group —SiOR1 and the halogenated silane group —SiX react with moisture to become —SiOH, which further undergoes dehydration condensation or hydrogen bonding with the OH group present on the surface of the mold material such as glass or metal. Wake up and join.
- FIG. 12 shows a reaction diagram of a mold release agent using an alkoxysilane group as an example of a hydrolyzable functional group at the terminal and an OH group on the surface of the master 10A.
- —OR represents methoxy (—OCH 3 ) or ethoxy (—OC 2 H 5 ), and generates methanol (CH 3 OH) or ethanol (C 2 H 5 OH) by hydrolysis.
- silanol (-SiOH) in FIG. Thereafter, it is partially dehydrated and condensed to form a silanol condensate as shown in FIG. Further, as shown in FIG. 12 (d), it is adsorbed by OH groups and hydrogen bonds on the surface of the master 10 (inorganic material), and finally dehydrated as shown in FIG. 12 (e) to form —O—chemical bonds (covalent bonds).
- FIG. 12 shows the case of an alkoxysilane group, but basically the same reaction occurs in the case of a halogenated silane group.
- the mold release agent used in the present invention is chemically bonded to the surface of the master 10A at one end and the functional group is oriented at the other end to cover the master 10A, and is thin and uniform in durability.
- a release layer can be formed.
- a structure having a releasability function preferably has a low surface energy, such as a fluorine-substituted hydrocarbon group or a hydrocarbon group.
- Fluorine-substituted hydrocarbon groups include fluorine-substituted hydrocarbons that have a perfluoro group (a and b are integers) such as CF3 (CF2) a- and CF3 / CF3 / CF (CF2) b- groups at one end of the molecular structure.
- a hydrocarbon group is preferable, and the length of the perfluoro group is preferably 2 or more, and the number of CF2 groups following CF3 of CF3 (CF2) a- is 5 or more.
- the perfluoro group does not need to be a straight chain and may have a branched structure.
- a structure such as CF3 (CF2) c- (CH2) d- (CF2) e- may be used in response to recent environmental problems.
- c is 3 or less
- d is an integer (preferably 1)
- e is 4 or less.
- the above-mentioned fluorine release agent is usually a solid, but in order to apply it to the surface of the master 10A, it is necessary to make it a solution dissolved in an organic solvent.
- a fluorinated hydrocarbon solvent or a mixture of some organic solvent is suitable as the solvent.
- the concentration of the solvent is not particularly limited, but the required release film is characterized by being particularly thin. Therefore, a low concentration is sufficient, and it may be 1 to 3% by mass.
- a normal coating method such as dip coating, spray coating, brush coating, spin coating or the like can be used. After application, the solvent is evaporated by natural drying to obtain a dry coating film.
- the film thickness applied at this time is suitably 20 ⁇ m or less.
- hydrocarbon release agent The hydrocarbon group may be linear, such as CnH2n + 1, or may be branched, and a silicone-based mold release agent is applicable.
- compositions having an organopolysiloxane resin as a main component are known as compositions having an organopolysiloxane resin as a main component and forming a cured film exhibiting water repellency.
- JP-A-55-48245 discloses a hydroxyl group-containing methylpolysiloxane resin, ⁇ , ⁇ -dihydroxydiorganopolysiloxane, and organosilane, which are cured to have excellent releasability and antifouling properties and water repellency.
- Compositions that form certain films have been proposed.
- 59-140280 discloses a composition mainly composed of a partial cohydrolyzed condensate of an organosilane mainly composed of a perfluoroalkyl group-containing organosilane and an amino group-containing organosilane.
- a composition that forms a cured film excellent in oil repellency has been proposed.
- the light source 50 disposed above the master 10A is turned on and irradiated with light.
- Examples of the light source 50 include a high-pressure mercury lamp, a metal halide lamp, a xenon lamp, a halogen lamp, a fluorescent lamp, a black light, a G lamp, and an F lamp, and may be a linear light source or a point light source.
- the high-pressure mercury lamp is a lamp having a narrow spectrum at 365 nm and 436 nm.
- a metal halide lamp is a kind of mercury lamp, and its output in the ultraviolet region is several times higher than that of a high-pressure mercury lamp.
- a xenon lamp is a lamp having a spectrum closest to sunlight. Halogen lamps contain a lot of long-wavelength light and are mostly near-infrared light.
- a fluorescent lamp has an irradiation intensity equal to the three primary colors of light. Black light has a peak top at 351 nm and emits near-ultraviolet light from 300 nm to 400 nm.
- a plurality of linear or point light sources 50 may be arranged in a lattice shape so that light reaches the entire surface of the resin 22A at one time.
- the light source 50 may be scanned in parallel to the surface of the resin 22A so that the light sequentially reaches the resin 22A.
- the luminance distribution and the illuminance (intensity) distribution during light irradiation are measured, and the number of irradiations, the irradiation amount, the irradiation time, and the like are controlled based on the measurement results.
- the submaster 20 may be post-cured (heat treatment). If post cure is performed, the resin 22A of the submaster 20 can be completely cured, and the mold life of the submaster 20 can be extended.
- the resin 22A is a thermosetting resin
- the resin 22A is heated while controlling the heating temperature and heating time within an optimal range.
- the resin 22A can also be molded by techniques such as injection molding, press molding, light irradiation and subsequent cooling.
- the sub master substrate 26 is mounted on the back surface (the surface opposite to the concave portion 24) of the sub master molding portion 22 (resin 22A), and the sub master molding portion 22 is lined.
- the sub-master substrate 26 may be quartz or a glass plate, and it is important to have sufficient bending strength and UV transmittance.
- a treatment such as applying a silane coupling agent may be performed on the sub-master substrate 26.
- the submaster substrate 26 is mounted (room temperature). Use an adhesive.
- the convex portion 14 of the master 10A may be transferred to the resin 22A, and the sub-master substrate 26 may be mounted (backed at room temperature) before the resin 22A is cured.
- the sub-master substrate 26 is attached by the adhesive force of the resin 22A, or a coupling agent is applied to the sub-master substrate 26 to increase the adhesive force and thereby apply the resin 22A to the resin 22A.
- the sub master substrate 26 is attached.
- the sub master molding portion 22 (resin 22A) with the sub master substrate 26
- a known vacuum chuck device 260 is used, and the sub master substrate 26 is sucked and held on the suction surface 260A of the vacuum chuck device 260.
- the sub master molding portion 22 is preferably lined with the sub master substrate 26 with the suction surface 260A parallel to the molding surface of the convex portion 14 in the master 10A.
- the back surface 20A of the sub master 20 (surface on the sub master substrate 26 side) is parallel to the molding surface of the convex portion 14 in the master 10A
- the molding surface of the recess 24 in the sub master 20 is parallel to the back surface 20A.
- the reference surface of the submaster 20 that is, the back surface 20 ⁇ / b> A can be made parallel to the molding surface of the recess 24. And variation in thickness can be prevented, and the shape accuracy of the lens unit 5 can be improved. Further, since the sub master 20 is sucked and held by the vacuum chuck device 260, the sub master 20 can be attached and detached only by turning on / off the vacuum exhaust. Therefore, the sub master 20 can be easily arranged.
- back surface 20A is parallel to the molding surface of the recess 24 specifically means that the back surface 20A is perpendicular to the central axis of the molding surface of the recess 24.
- the sub master 20 is preferably formed by being cured while being lined with the sub master substrate 26, but may be formed by being cured before being lined.
- a thermosetting resin is used as the resin 22A, and these are put into a baking furnace in a state where the resin 22A is filled between the master 10A and the sub master substrate 26.
- the suction surface 260A of the vacuum chuck device 260 is preferably made of a ceramic material.
- the hardness of the suction surface 260A is increased, and the suction surface 260A is not easily damaged by the attachment / detachment of the submaster 20 (submaster substrate 26), so that the surface accuracy of the suction surface 260A can be maintained high.
- the following method is used as a method for bringing the suction surface 260A in parallel with the molding surface of the convex portion 14 in the master 10A.
- the front and back surfaces of the master 10A are parallelized with high accuracy. Thereby, in the master 10A, the shaping
- reference members 260C and 260D are provided so as to protrude from the support surface 260B that supports the master 10A from the back surface (surface opposite to the convex portion 14) and the suction surface 260A, respectively.
- the shapes of these reference members 260C and 260D are such that there is no backlash when the master 10A and the sub-master 20 come into contact with each other with the support surface 260B and the suction surface 260A in parallel with each other.
- the reference member may be provided on at least one of the support surface 260B and the suction surface 260A.
- the shape of the reference member is the support surface.
- the shape of the reference member is such that the support surface 260B and the suction surface 260A are supported when the master 10A and the sub master 20 are in contact with each other. What is necessary is just to make it the shape which does not rattle with respect to the surface 260B, and contact
- the sub master 20 is formed by releasing the sub master molding portion 22 and the sub master substrate 26 from the master 10A.
- a resin such as PDMS (polydimethylsiloxane) is used as the resin 22A, so that a large force is not required for peeling from the master 10, and the molding optical surface may be distorted. There is no need.
- PDMS polydimethylsiloxane
- a resin 5A is filled between the sub-master 20 and the glass substrate 3 and cured. More specifically, the resin 5A is filled in the recess 24 of the submaster 20, and the resin 5A is cured while pressing the glass substrate 3 from above.
- the resin 5A When filling the concave portion 24 of the sub master 20 with the resin 5A, the resin 5A is sprayed on the sub master 20 using a technique such as spray coating or spin coating. In this case, the resin 5A may be filled while evacuating. If the resin 5A is filled while evacuating, the resin 5A can be cured without introducing bubbles into the resin 5A.
- the resin 5A may be applied to the glass substrate 3, and the glass substrate 3 coated with the resin 5A may be pressed against the submaster 20.
- the glass substrate 3 When the glass substrate 3 is pressed, the glass substrate 3 is preferably provided with a structure for axial alignment with the submaster 20.
- the glass substrate 3 has a circular shape, for example, it is preferable to form a D cut, an I cut, a marking, a notch, or the like.
- the glass substrate 3 may have a polygonal shape, and in this case, the axis alignment with the submaster 20 is easy.
- the light source 52 disposed below the sub master 20 may be turned on to emit light from the sub master 20 side, or the light source 54 disposed above the glass substrate 3 may be turned on to turn on the glass substrate.
- the light may be irradiated from the 3 side, or both the light sources 52 and 54 may be turned on simultaneously and the light may be irradiated from both the sub master 20 side and the glass substrate 3 side.
- the same high pressure mercury lamp, metal halide lamp, xenon lamp, halogen lamp, fluorescent lamp, black light, G lamp, and F lamp as the light source 50 described above can be used. It may be a point light source.
- a plurality of linear or point light sources 52 and 54 may be arranged in a lattice shape so that the light reaches the resin 5A at a time.
- the point light sources 52 and 54 may be scanned in parallel to the sub master 20 and the glass substrate 3 so that the light sequentially reaches the resin 5A.
- the luminance distribution and the illuminance (intensity) distribution during light irradiation are measured, and the number of irradiations, the irradiation amount, the irradiation time, and the like are controlled based on the measurement results.
- the lens portion 5 is formed. Thereafter, the lens unit 5 and the glass substrate 3 are released from the sub-master 20 to manufacture the wafer lens 1 (the wafer lens 1 has the lens unit 5 formed only on the surface of the glass substrate 3). .
- a tension white 60 is provided between the wafer lens 1 (glass substrate 3) and the sub master 20 in advance (see FIG. 3B).
- the wafer lens 1 may be released from the sub master 20 by pulling.
- the wafer lens 1 When the sub-master substrate 26 of the sub-master 20 is an elastic material (resin), the wafer lens 1 may be released from the sub-master 20 by bending it slightly, or the glass substrate 3 is replaced with glass. Even in the case of an elastic material (resin), the wafer lens 1 may be released from the sub master 20 by slightly bending it.
- the method of providing the lens unit 5 on one side of the glass substrate 3 has been described.
- the lens unit 5 when the lens unit 5 is provided on both sides, first, it corresponds to the optical surface shape of the lens unit 5 on one side of the glass substrate 3.
- a master (not shown) having a plurality of positive molding surfaces and a master having a plurality of positive molding surfaces corresponding to the optical surface shape of the lens portion 5 on the other surface are prepared, and each of these masters is used.
- the sub masters 20C and 20D are formed.
- the sub master 20C has a negative molding surface corresponding to the optical surface shape of the lens portion 5 on one surface of the glass substrate 3, and the sub master 20D corresponds to the optical surface shape of the lens portion 5 on the other surface. Will have a negative shaped molding surface.
- the resin 5A is hardened and the lens part 5 is shape
- the resin 5A does not cure and shrink on only one side of the glass substrate 3, and the resin 5A cures and shrinks simultaneously on both sides to become the lens portions 5, respectively.
- the curvature of the glass substrate 3 can be prevented, the shape accuracy of the lens part 5 can be improved.
- a heating step may be provided after the resin 5A is cured by irradiating light on both surfaces.
- the post-cure process it is possible to suppress a decrease in accuracy due to the curing and shrinkage of the lens unit 5 after taking out from the sub master, and the transfer accuracy is further improved.
- the process which once heats in the state which provided each submaster 20C and 20D in the both surfaces of the glass substrate 3, releases from a submaster, and heats again may be provided.
- curing shrinkage can be suppressed to some extent in the first heating step, and the hardness of the lens can be increased by heating again, and the time for using the submaster mold can be increased. Since it becomes possible to shorten, manufacturing efficiency can be improved. It is also preferable to provide a plurality of heating steps at different temperatures in a state where the sub-master molds 20C and 20D are provided on both surfaces of the glass substrate 3. In the first heating process, it is possible to accelerate curing by heating at a relatively low temperature, and to suppress curing shrinkage after removal, and in the second heating process, it is relatively higher than the first heating process. By heating at a temperature, it becomes possible to improve the releasability from the submaster.
- the submaster 20C and the glass substrate disposed above the submaster 20C are disposed. 3 and the glass substrate 3 and the sub-master 20C are filled with the resin 5A, and then the glass substrate 3 and the sub-master 20C are integrally turned upside down in a state of contacting each other. And after dripping or discharging the resin 5A onto the upper surface of the sub master 20D, the sub master 20D is brought into contact with the glass substrate 3 disposed above the sub master 20D, and the glass substrate 3 and the sub master 20D are brought into contact with each other. The resin 5A is filled.
- the glass substrate 3 and the sub master 20C disposed above the glass substrate 3 are brought into contact with each other.
- the resin 5A is filled between the masters 20C, and after the resin 5A is dropped or discharged onto the upper surface of the submaster 20D, the submaster 20D is brought into contact with the glass substrate 3 disposed thereabove. Then, the resin 5A is filled between the glass substrate 3 and the sub master 20D.
- the resin 5A used here may be a thermosetting resin, a UV curable resin, or a volatile curable resin (HSQ or the like).
- a UV curable resin is used, at least one of the sub-masters 20C and 20D is made to be UV transmissive so that the UV light is irradiated on the resin 5A on both surfaces of the glass substrate 3 from one sub-master side at a time. be able to.
- the sub master 20 is doubled vertically and horizontally (magnification can be changed).
- the diameter submaster 200 and the normal submaster 20 of FIG. 8 are prepared.
- the sub master 200 is used, and when the lens unit 5 is formed on the reverse side, the sub master 20 is used a plurality of times. May be.
- the lens portion 5 is formed in a lump on the surface of the glass substrate 3 using the large-diameter submaster 200.
- the lens unit 5 is formed by using the submaster 20 four times while shifting the submaster 20 by a quarter of the large-diameter submaster 200.
- the axis alignment of the sub master 20 is easy with respect to the glass substrate 3 having the lens portion 5 formed using the large-diameter submaster 200, and the lens formed using the large-diameter submaster 200. It is possible to suppress a situation in which the portion 5 and the lens portion 5 formed using the sub master 20 are misaligned on the front and back of the glass substrate 3.
- a region (stress relaxation portion 210) in which the resin 22 ⁇ / b> A does not exist in a cross shape is provided in the center so as to divide the large-diameter submaster 200, and the submaster molding portion 22 of the large-diameter submaster 200 It is preferable to adopt a configuration that suppresses the occurrence of warping (relaxes stress with the glass substrate 3).
- the stress relaxation unit 210 may be a region where the resin 22A does not exist as in the present embodiment, or the resin may be formed thin. Moreover, the stress relaxation part 210 may be provided every several lens shaping
- the stress relieving portion 210 is provided, for example, when the resin 22A is a photocurable resin, the glass substrate 3 or the sub master substrate 26 is masked to form an unirradiated portion, or the light sources 52 and 54 are masked. Thus, an unirradiated portion of light may be formed.
- the master 10B may be used in place of the master 10A, and the wafer lens 1 may be manufactured directly from the master 10B without manufacturing the sub-master 20.
- the recess 5 of the master 10B is filled with the resin 5A, the resin 5A is cured while pressing the glass substrate 3 from above, and then the glass substrate 3 and the lens unit 5 are released from the master 10B. .
- the mold release for peeling the resin 5A from the master 10B is important, and two types of mold release methods are conceivable.
- a release agent is added to the resin 5A.
- the adhesion of the anti-reflection coating which is a subsequent process, is lowered, or the adhesion to the glass substrate 3 is lowered.
- a coupling agent or the like is applied to the glass substrate 3 to enhance the adhesion. To do.
- a release agent is coated on the surface of the master 10B.
- the release agent triazine dithiol, a release agent that forms a fluorine-based or silicon-based monomolecular layer can be used.
- a release agent it is possible to coat the film to a thickness that does not affect the optical surface shape, with a film thickness of about 10 nm.
- the coupling agent is applied to the master 10B, or the master 10B is coated with SiO 2 or the like that creates a bridge between the release agent and the master 10B. If done, the adhesion may be increased.
- the second embodiment is mainly different from the first embodiment in the following points, and is otherwise substantially the same.
- a master 10, a sub master 30, and a sub sub master 40 shown in FIG. 4 are used as molds for molding.
- the sub-master 20 is used to manufacture the wafer lens 1 from the master 10 (10A)
- the wafer lens 1 is mainly from the master 10 (10B).
- two types of sub-master 30 and sub-sub-master 40 are used to manufacture the sub-master.
- the process of manufacturing the sub master 30 from the master 10B and the process of manufacturing the wafer lens 1 from the sub sub master 40 are substantially the same as in the first embodiment, and the first is that the sub sub master 40 is manufactured from the sub master 30. This is different from the embodiment.
- the master 10 ⁇ / b> B is a mold in which a plurality of concave portions 16 are formed in an array shape with respect to a rectangular parallelepiped base portion 12.
- the shape of the concave portion 16 is a negative shape corresponding to the lens portion 5 of the wafer lens 1, and is concave in a substantially hemispherical shape in this figure.
- the master 10B may be formed by cutting an optical surface with high accuracy by diamond cutting of a material such as nickel phosphorus, aluminum alloy, free-cutting cast metal, or grinding a high-hardness material such as carbide. It may also have been created.
- the optical surface created by the master 10B is preferably one in which a plurality of recesses 16 are arranged in an array as shown in FIG. 4, and only a single recess 16 may be arranged.
- the submaster 30 includes a submaster molding portion 32 and a submaster substrate 36.
- a plurality of convex portions 34 are formed in an array on the sub master molding portion 32.
- the shape of the convex portion 34 is a positive shape corresponding to the lens portion 5 of the wafer lens 1 and protrudes in a substantially hemispherical shape in this figure.
- the sub master molding part 32 is formed of a resin 32A.
- the resin 32A can basically use the same material as the resin 22A of the sub-master 20 of the first embodiment, but is particularly releasable and heat resistant, and has a small linear expansion coefficient (ie It is preferable to use a resin having a small surface energy.
- a resin having a small surface energy any of the above-mentioned photo-curing resin, thermosetting resin, and thermoplastic resin may be used, and it may be transparent or opaque.
- thermosetting resin the above-mentioned fluorine-based resin may be used. is necessary. This is because when the silicone resin is used, the coefficient of linear expansion is large, so that it deforms when thermally transferred to the sub-submaster 40, and the fine structure cannot be accurately transferred.
- the same material as the sub master substrate 26 can be used for the sub master substrate 36.
- the sub-sub master 40 includes a sub-sub master molding portion 42 and a sub-sub master substrate 46.
- a plurality of recesses 44 are formed in an array in the sub-submaster molding part 42.
- the concave portion 44 is a portion corresponding to the lens portion 5 of the wafer lens 1 and is concave in a substantially hemispherical shape.
- the sub-sub master molding part 42 is formed of a resin 42A.
- the resin 42A can use the same material as the resin 22A of the submaster 20 of the first embodiment, but uses a silicone resin or an olefin resin because it can be bent and easily released. It is preferable to do.
- the same material as the sub master substrate 26 can be used for the sub sub master substrate 46.
- a resin 32A is applied on the master 10B, the resin 32A is cured, the concave portions 16 of the master 10B are transferred to the resin 32A, and a plurality of convex portions 34 are formed on the resin 32A. Thereby, the submaster molding part 32 is formed.
- the sub master substrate 36 is bonded to the sub master molding portion 32.
- the sub-master molding part 32 and the sub-master substrate 36 are released from the master 10B, and the sub-master 30 is manufactured.
- a resin 42A is applied on the sub master 30, the resin 42A is cured, and the convex portions 34 of the sub master 30 are transferred to the resin 42A. Form. Thereby, the sub-submaster molding part 42 is formed.
- the sub-sub master substrate 46 is mounted on the sub-sub master molding portion 42.
- the sub-sub-master 40 is manufactured by releasing the sub-sub-master molding part 42 and the sub-sub-master substrate 46 from the sub-master 30.
- the resin 5A is filled into the recess 44 of the sub-sub master 40, and the resin 5A is cured while pressing the glass substrate 3 from above. As a result, the lens portion 5 is formed from the resin 5A. Thereafter, the lens unit 5 and the glass substrate 3 are released from the sub-submaster 40, and the wafer lens 1 is manufactured (the wafer lens 1 has the lens unit 5 formed only on the surface of the glass substrate 3). .
- the lens unit 5 When the lens unit 5 is formed on the back surface of the glass substrate 3 and the lens unit 5 is formed on both the front and back surfaces of the glass substrate 3, it corresponds to the optical surface shape of the lens unit 5 on one surface of the glass substrate 3.
- a master (not shown) having a plurality of negative-shaped molding surfaces and a master having a plurality of negative-shaped molding surfaces corresponding to the optical surface shape of the lens portion 5 on the other surface are prepared, and each of these masters is used. Then, a sub master having a positive molding surface is formed, and further, a sub sub master is formed using each of these sub masters. And after filling resin 5A between each sub-submaster and the glass substrate 3, the resin 5A is hardened and the lens part 5 is shape
Landscapes
- Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- Optics & Photonics (AREA)
- Manufacturing & Machinery (AREA)
- Mechanical Engineering (AREA)
- Epoxy Resins (AREA)
Abstract
Disclosed is a method for producing a wafer lens (1) comprising a glass substrate (3) and, provided thereon, lens portions (5) made of a first curable resin (5A). When, from a master (10) having plural positive mold surfaces corresponding to the shape of optical surfaces of the lens portions (5), a submaster mold portion (22) having plural negative mold surfaces corresponding to the shape of the optical surfaces is molded with a second curable resin (22A), the submaster mold portion (22) is lined with a submaster substrate (26) to form a submaster (20), and a first curable resin (5A) is filled between the submaster (20) and the glass substrate (3) and cured to form the lens portions (5), an epoxy compound represented by Formula (A) is used as the first curable resin.
Description
本発明は、ウエハレンズの製造方法及びウエハレンズに関する。
The present invention relates to a wafer lens manufacturing method and a wafer lens.
光学レンズの製造分野において、ガラス平板に硬化性樹脂からなるレンズ部(光学部材)を設けることで、耐熱性の高い光学レンズを得る技術が従来より検討されている(例えば、特許文献1参照)。
In the field of manufacturing optical lenses, a technique for obtaining an optical lens having high heat resistance by providing a lens portion (optical member) made of a curable resin on a glass flat plate has been studied (see, for example, Patent Document 1). .
硬化性樹脂としては大きく分けて光硬化性樹脂と熱硬化性樹脂とに分類することができる。光硬化性樹脂としては、アクリル樹脂、アリル樹脂、エポキシ系の樹脂などがあり、アクリル樹脂及びアリル樹脂であれば、ラジカル重合により反応硬化させることができる。エポキシ系の樹脂であれば、カチオン重合により反応硬化させることができる。一方、熱硬化性樹脂はラジカル重合やカチオン重合の他にシリコーン等のように付加重合により硬化させることもできる。
Curing resins can be broadly classified into photo-curing resins and thermosetting resins. Examples of the photocurable resin include an acrylic resin, an allyl resin, an epoxy resin, and the like. If the acrylic resin and the allyl resin are used, they can be cured by radical polymerization. Any epoxy resin can be cured by cationic polymerization. On the other hand, the thermosetting resin can be cured by addition polymerization such as silicone in addition to radical polymerization and cationic polymerization.
最近では、上記技術を適用した光学レンズの製造方法として、ガラス平板に対して硬化性樹脂からなる光学部材を複数設けた、いわゆる「ウエハレンズ」を形成することで、複数のレンズを一体化された状態で同時に成形し、成形後にガラス平板部をカットする方法が開発されている。この製造方法によれば、一度のカット処理で多数の光学レンズを量産可能であることから、光学レンズの製造コストを低減することができる。
特許第3926380号公報
Recently, as a method of manufacturing an optical lens to which the above technique is applied, a plurality of lenses are integrated by forming a so-called “wafer lens” in which a plurality of optical members made of a curable resin are provided on a glass flat plate. A method has been developed in which a glass flat plate portion is cut at the same time and the glass flat plate portion is cut after the forming. According to this manufacturing method, since a large number of optical lenses can be mass-produced by a single cutting process, the manufacturing cost of the optical lens can be reduced.
Japanese Patent No. 3926380
上記ウエハレンズは、光学部材の構成材料として、硬化速度が速いという理由から、UV硬化性樹脂を用いるのが好ましい。UV硬化性樹脂としては、主にラジカル重合型、カチオン重合型が知られている。アクリル系樹脂のようなラジカル重合系の場合は、酸素による硬化阻害の影響を受けるため、窒素などの不活性ガスによりパージするといった工夫が必要である。また、アクリル系樹脂は硬化による収縮が非常に大きい(10%程度)ため、所望の微細形状に成形できない、表面が凹凸となる、といった不都合がある。
For the wafer lens, it is preferable to use a UV curable resin as a constituent material of the optical member because of its high curing speed. As the UV curable resin, a radical polymerization type and a cation polymerization type are mainly known. In the case of a radical polymerization system such as an acrylic resin, since it is affected by the inhibition of curing by oxygen, it is necessary to devise purging with an inert gas such as nitrogen. In addition, since the acrylic resin has a very large shrinkage due to curing (about 10%), it cannot be molded into a desired fine shape, and the surface is uneven.
一方、エポキシ樹脂は硬化による収縮が小さい(2~3%程度)ため、微細形状であってもきれいに成形することができる。しかし、エポキシ樹脂のモノマーの多くは、(Ames陽性であって)、高い皮膚感作性を有しており、その使用できる環境等が高い割合で制限されているというのが現状である。
On the other hand, since epoxy resin has a small shrinkage due to curing (about 2 to 3%), it can be neatly molded even in a fine shape. However, many of the monomers of the epoxy resin (Ames positive) have high skin sensitization, and the current situation is that the environment in which they can be used is restricted at a high rate.
したがって、本発明の主な目的は、エポキシ樹脂を用いたウエハレンズ及びその製造方法であって、皮膚感作性を抑えた、極めて安全性の高いウエハレンズ及びその製造方法を提供することである。
Therefore, a main object of the present invention is to provide a wafer lens using an epoxy resin and a method for manufacturing the same, and a highly safe wafer lens with reduced skin sensitization and a method for manufacturing the same. .
本発明に係るウエハレンズの製造方法は、
基板に対し第1の硬化性樹脂製の光学部材が設けられたウエハレンズの製造方法であって、
前記光学部材の光学面形状に対応したポジ形状の成形面を複数有するマスター成形型から、前記光学面形状に対応したネガ形状の成形面を複数有するサブマスター成形部を第2の硬化性樹脂によって成形するとともに、当該サブマスター成形部をサブマスター基板で裏打ちすることによってサブマスター成形型を形成し、
当該サブマスター成形型と、前記基板との間に前記第1の硬化性樹脂を充填して硬化させ前記光学部材を成形する場合に、
前記第1の硬化性樹脂として、下記一般式(A)で表されるエポキシ化合物を使用することを特徴とするものである。 A method for manufacturing a wafer lens according to the present invention includes:
A wafer lens manufacturing method in which an optical member made of a first curable resin is provided on a substrate,
From a master mold having a plurality of positive molding surfaces corresponding to the optical surface shape of the optical member, a sub master molding part having a plurality of negative molding surfaces corresponding to the optical surface shape is formed by the second curable resin. And forming a sub master mold by backing the sub master molding part with a sub master substrate,
When the optical member is molded by filling the first curable resin between the sub-master mold and the substrate and curing the mold,
As the first curable resin, an epoxy compound represented by the following general formula (A) is used.
基板に対し第1の硬化性樹脂製の光学部材が設けられたウエハレンズの製造方法であって、
前記光学部材の光学面形状に対応したポジ形状の成形面を複数有するマスター成形型から、前記光学面形状に対応したネガ形状の成形面を複数有するサブマスター成形部を第2の硬化性樹脂によって成形するとともに、当該サブマスター成形部をサブマスター基板で裏打ちすることによってサブマスター成形型を形成し、
当該サブマスター成形型と、前記基板との間に前記第1の硬化性樹脂を充填して硬化させ前記光学部材を成形する場合に、
前記第1の硬化性樹脂として、下記一般式(A)で表されるエポキシ化合物を使用することを特徴とするものである。 A method for manufacturing a wafer lens according to the present invention includes:
A wafer lens manufacturing method in which an optical member made of a first curable resin is provided on a substrate,
From a master mold having a plurality of positive molding surfaces corresponding to the optical surface shape of the optical member, a sub master molding part having a plurality of negative molding surfaces corresponding to the optical surface shape is formed by the second curable resin. And forming a sub master mold by backing the sub master molding part with a sub master substrate,
When the optical member is molded by filling the first curable resin between the sub-master mold and the substrate and curing the mold,
As the first curable resin, an epoxy compound represented by the following general formula (A) is used.
〔式(A)中、R100は置換基を表し、m0は0~2の整数を、r0は1~3の整数を表す。L0は主鎖に酸素原子または硫黄原子を含んでも良い炭素数1~15のr0+1価の連結基または単結合を表す。〕
また、本発明に係るウエハレンズ、
下記一般式(A)で表されるエポキシ化合物を含有することを特徴とするものである。 [In the formula (A), R 100 represents a substituent, m0 represents an integer of 0 to 2, and r0 represents an integer of 1 to 3. L 0 represents an r0 + 1-valent linking group or a single bond having 1 to 15 carbon atoms, which may contain an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom in the main chain. ]
Further, the wafer lens according to the present invention,
It contains an epoxy compound represented by the following general formula (A).
また、本発明に係るウエハレンズ、
下記一般式(A)で表されるエポキシ化合物を含有することを特徴とするものである。 [In the formula (A), R 100 represents a substituent, m0 represents an integer of 0 to 2, and r0 represents an integer of 1 to 3. L 0 represents an r0 + 1-valent linking group or a single bond having 1 to 15 carbon atoms, which may contain an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom in the main chain. ]
Further, the wafer lens according to the present invention,
It contains an epoxy compound represented by the following general formula (A).
〔式(A)中、R100は置換基を表し、m0は0~2の整数を、r0は1~3の整数を表す。L0は主鎖に酸素原子または硫黄原子を含んでも良い炭素数1~15のr0+1価の連結基または単結合を表す。〕
また、本発明に係るウエハレンズは、
下記一般式(I)で表されるエポキシ化合物を含有することを特徴とするものである。 [In the formula (A), R 100 represents a substituent, m0 represents an integer of 0 to 2, and r0 represents an integer of 1 to 3. L 0 represents an r0 + 1-valent linking group or a single bond having 1 to 15 carbon atoms, which may contain an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom in the main chain. ]
Further, the wafer lens according to the present invention is:
It contains an epoxy compound represented by the following general formula (I).
また、本発明に係るウエハレンズは、
下記一般式(I)で表されるエポキシ化合物を含有することを特徴とするものである。 [In the formula (A), R 100 represents a substituent, m0 represents an integer of 0 to 2, and r0 represents an integer of 1 to 3. L 0 represents an r0 + 1-valent linking group or a single bond having 1 to 15 carbon atoms, which may contain an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom in the main chain. ]
Further, the wafer lens according to the present invention is:
It contains an epoxy compound represented by the following general formula (I).
〔式(I)中、R101は置換基を表し、m1は0~2の整数を、p1、q1はそれぞれ0または1を、r1は1~3の整数を表す。L1は主鎖に酸素原子または硫黄原子を含んでも良い炭素数1~15のr1+1価の連結基または単結合を表す。〕
また、本発明に係るウエハレンズは、
下記一般式(II)で表されるエポキシ化合物を含有することを特徴とするものである。 [In the formula (I), R 101 represents a substituent, m1 represents an integer of 0 to 2, p1 and q1 each represents 0 or 1, and r1 represents an integer of 1 to 3. L 1 represents an r1 + 1 valent linking group having 1 to 15 carbon atoms or a single bond which may contain an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom in the main chain. ]
Further, the wafer lens according to the present invention is:
It contains an epoxy compound represented by the following general formula (II).
また、本発明に係るウエハレンズは、
下記一般式(II)で表されるエポキシ化合物を含有することを特徴とするものである。 [In the formula (I), R 101 represents a substituent, m1 represents an integer of 0 to 2, p1 and q1 each represents 0 or 1, and r1 represents an integer of 1 to 3. L 1 represents an r1 + 1 valent linking group having 1 to 15 carbon atoms or a single bond which may contain an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom in the main chain. ]
Further, the wafer lens according to the present invention is:
It contains an epoxy compound represented by the following general formula (II).
〔式(II)中、R102は置換基を表し、m2は0~2の整数を、p2、q2はそれぞれ0または1を、r2は1~3の整数を表す。L2は主鎖に酸素原子または硫黄原子を含んでも良い炭素数1~15のr2+1価の連結基または単結合を表す。〕
また、本発明に係るウエハレンズは、
下記一般式(III)~一般式(VI)で表されるエポキシ化合物の少なくとも1種を含有することを特徴とするものである。 [In the formula (II), R 102 represents a substituent, m2 represents an integer of 0 to 2, p2 and q2 each represents 0 or 1, and r2 represents an integer of 1 to 3. L 2 represents an r2 + 1 valent linking group or a single bond having 1 to 15 carbon atoms, which may contain an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom in the main chain. ]
Further, the wafer lens according to the present invention is:
It contains at least one epoxy compound represented by the following general formulas (III) to (VI).
また、本発明に係るウエハレンズは、
下記一般式(III)~一般式(VI)で表されるエポキシ化合物の少なくとも1種を含有することを特徴とするものである。 [In the formula (II), R 102 represents a substituent, m2 represents an integer of 0 to 2, p2 and q2 each represents 0 or 1, and r2 represents an integer of 1 to 3. L 2 represents an r2 + 1 valent linking group or a single bond having 1 to 15 carbon atoms, which may contain an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom in the main chain. ]
Further, the wafer lens according to the present invention is:
It contains at least one epoxy compound represented by the following general formulas (III) to (VI).
〔式(III)中、R103は置換基を表し、m3は0~2の整数を、p3は0または1を表す。L3は主鎖に酸素原子または硫黄原子を含んでも良い炭素数1~8の2価の連結基または単結合を表す。〕
[In the formula (III), R 103 represents a substituent, m3 represents an integer of 0 to 2, and p3 represents 0 or 1. L 3 represents a C 1-8 divalent linking group or single bond which may contain an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom in the main chain. ]
〔式(IV)中、R104は置換基を表し、m4は0~2の整数を、p4は0または1を表す。L4は主鎖に酸素原子または硫黄原子を含んでも良い炭素数1~8の2価の連結基または単結合を表す。〕
[In the formula (IV), R 104 represents a substituent, m4 represents an integer of 0 to 2, and p4 represents 0 or 1. L 4 represents a C 1-8 divalent linking group or single bond that may contain an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom in the main chain. ]
〔式(V)中、R105は置換基を表し、m5は1または2を表す。〕
[In Formula (V), R 105 represents a substituent, and m5 represents 1 or 2. ]
〔式(VI)中、R106は置換基を表し、m6は0~2の整数を表す。〕
好ましい態様のウエハレンズは、紫外線照射により酸を発生する光酸発生剤を含有し、さらに好ましくは、前記光酸発生剤がスルホニウム塩化合物である。 [In the formula (VI), R 106 represents a substituent, and m6 represents an integer of 0 to 2. ]
The wafer lens of a preferred embodiment contains a photoacid generator that generates an acid by ultraviolet irradiation, and more preferably, the photoacid generator is a sulfonium salt compound.
好ましい態様のウエハレンズは、紫外線照射により酸を発生する光酸発生剤を含有し、さらに好ましくは、前記光酸発生剤がスルホニウム塩化合物である。 [In the formula (VI), R 106 represents a substituent, and m6 represents an integer of 0 to 2. ]
The wafer lens of a preferred embodiment contains a photoacid generator that generates an acid by ultraviolet irradiation, and more preferably, the photoacid generator is a sulfonium salt compound.
また、好ましい態様のウエハレンズは、オキセタン化合物を含有する。
Further, the wafer lens according to a preferred embodiment contains an oxetane compound.
本発明によれば、第1の硬化性樹脂として前述した一般式(A)や一般式(I)~(VI)で表される特殊な構造を有するエポキシ化合物(エポキシ樹脂)を使用したり、そのエポキシ化合物を含有するから、皮膚感作性を抑えることができ、安全性の高いウエハレンズを製造することができる。
According to the present invention, an epoxy compound (epoxy resin) having a special structure represented by the general formula (A) or the general formulas (I) to (VI) described above is used as the first curable resin, Since it contains the epoxy compound, skin sensitization can be suppressed, and a highly safe wafer lens can be produced.
1 ウエハレンズ
3 ガラス基板
5 レンズ部
5A 樹脂
10(10A、10B) マスター
12 ベース部
14 凸部
16 凹部
20 サブマスター
22 サブマスター成形部
22A 樹脂
24 凹部
25 凸部
26 サブマスター基板
30 サブマスター
32 サブマスター成形部
32A 樹脂
34 凸部
36 サブマスター基板
40 サブサブマスター
42 サブサブマスター成形部
42A 樹脂
44 凹部
46 サブサブマスター基板
50、52、54 光源
60 引張りシロ
200 大径サブマスター
210 応力緩和部 DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1Wafer lens 3 Glass substrate 5 Lens part 5A Resin 10 (10A, 10B) Master 12 Base part 14 Convex part 16 Concave part 20 Submaster 22 Submaster molding part 22A Resin 24 Concave part 25 Convex part 26 Submaster board 30 Submaster 32 Sub Master molding part 32A Resin 34 Convex part 36 Sub master substrate 40 Sub sub master 42 Sub sub master molding part 42A Resin 44 Concave part 46 Sub sub master substrate 50, 52, 54 Light source 60 Tension white 200 Large diameter sub master 210 Stress relaxation part
3 ガラス基板
5 レンズ部
5A 樹脂
10(10A、10B) マスター
12 ベース部
14 凸部
16 凹部
20 サブマスター
22 サブマスター成形部
22A 樹脂
24 凹部
25 凸部
26 サブマスター基板
30 サブマスター
32 サブマスター成形部
32A 樹脂
34 凸部
36 サブマスター基板
40 サブサブマスター
42 サブサブマスター成形部
42A 樹脂
44 凹部
46 サブサブマスター基板
50、52、54 光源
60 引張りシロ
200 大径サブマスター
210 応力緩和部 DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1
以下、図面を参照しながら本発明の実施形態について説明する。
[第1の実施形態]
図1に示す通り、ウエハレンズ1は円形状のガラス基板(基板)3と複数のレンズ部(光学部材)5とを有しており、ガラス基板3上に複数のレンズ部5がアレイ状に配置された構成となっている。レンズ部5はガラス基板3の表面に形成されていてもよいし、表裏両面に形成されていてもよい。
<レンズ部>
レンズ部5は樹脂5A(第1の硬化性樹脂)で形成されている。樹脂5Aとしては、エポキシ系の硬化性樹脂を用いることができる。硬化性樹脂としては大きく分けて光硬化性樹脂と熱硬化性樹脂に分類することができる。光硬化性エポキシ系の樹脂であればカチオン重合により反応硬化させることができる。一方、熱硬化性樹脂はラジカル重合やカチオン重合により硬化させることができる。 Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
[First Embodiment]
As shown in FIG. 1, the wafer lens 1 has a circular glass substrate (substrate) 3 and a plurality of lens portions (optical members) 5, and the plurality oflens portions 5 are arranged in an array on the glass substrate 3. It is an arranged configuration. The lens unit 5 may be formed on the surface of the glass substrate 3 or may be formed on both front and back surfaces.
<Lens part>
Thelens unit 5 is formed of a resin 5A (first curable resin). As the resin 5A, an epoxy curable resin can be used. The curable resin can be roughly classified into a photocurable resin and a thermosetting resin. Any photo-curable epoxy resin can be cured by cationic polymerization. On the other hand, the thermosetting resin can be cured by radical polymerization or cationic polymerization.
[第1の実施形態]
図1に示す通り、ウエハレンズ1は円形状のガラス基板(基板)3と複数のレンズ部(光学部材)5とを有しており、ガラス基板3上に複数のレンズ部5がアレイ状に配置された構成となっている。レンズ部5はガラス基板3の表面に形成されていてもよいし、表裏両面に形成されていてもよい。
<レンズ部>
レンズ部5は樹脂5A(第1の硬化性樹脂)で形成されている。樹脂5Aとしては、エポキシ系の硬化性樹脂を用いることができる。硬化性樹脂としては大きく分けて光硬化性樹脂と熱硬化性樹脂に分類することができる。光硬化性エポキシ系の樹脂であればカチオン重合により反応硬化させることができる。一方、熱硬化性樹脂はラジカル重合やカチオン重合により硬化させることができる。 Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
[First Embodiment]
As shown in FIG. 1, the wafer lens 1 has a circular glass substrate (substrate) 3 and a plurality of lens portions (optical members) 5, and the plurality of
<Lens part>
The
具体的に、レンズ部5を構成する樹脂5Aとしては、前記一般式(A)、一般式(I)~一般式(VI)で表されるいずれかの脂環式エポキシド化合物が使用可能である。樹脂5Aは、1種類の脂環式エポキシド化合物で構成されてもよいし、複数種類の脂環式エポキシド化合物を組み合わせて構成されてもよい。
Specifically, as the resin 5A constituting the lens unit 5, any of the alicyclic epoxide compounds represented by the general formula (A), the general formula (I) to the general formula (VI) can be used. . The resin 5A may be composed of one type of alicyclic epoxide compound, or may be composed of a combination of a plurality of types of alicyclic epoxide compounds.
前記一般式(A)、一般式(I)~一般式(VI)において、R100、R101、R102、R103、R104、R105、R106は各々置換基を表す。該置換基としては、例えば、ハロゲン原子(例えば、塩素原子、臭素原子、フッ素原子等)、炭素数1~6個のアルキル基(例えば、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、イソプロピル基、ブチル基等)、炭素数1~6個のアルコキシ基(例えば、メトキシ基、エトキシ基、n-プロポキシ基、iso-プロポキシ基、n-ブトキシ基、tert-ブトキシ基等)、アシル基(例えば、アセチル基、プロピオニル基、トリフルオロアセチル基等)、アシルオキシ基(例えば、アセトキシ基、プロピオニルオキシ基、トリフルオロアセトキシ基等)、アルコキシカルボニル基(例えば、メトキシカルボニル基、エトキシカルボニル基、tert-ブトキシカルボニル基等)等が挙げられる。上記置換基の中でも好ましいものは、アルキル基、アルコキシ基、またはアルコキシカルボニル基である。
In the general formula (A) and the general formulas (I) to (VI), R 100 , R 101 , R 102 , R 103 , R 104 , R 105 , and R 106 each represent a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom (eg, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, a fluorine atom, etc.), an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms (eg, a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an isopropyl group, a butyl group). Etc.), an alkoxy group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms (for example, methoxy group, ethoxy group, n-propoxy group, iso-propoxy group, n-butoxy group, tert-butoxy group, etc.), acyl group (for example, acetyl group) , Propionyl group, trifluoroacetyl group, etc.), acyloxy group (eg, acetoxy group, propionyloxy group, trifluoroacetoxy group, etc.), alkoxycarbonyl group (eg, methoxycarbonyl group, ethoxycarbonyl group, tert-butoxycarbonyl group, etc.) ) And the like. Among the above substituents, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, or an alkoxycarbonyl group is preferable.
前記一般式(A)、一般式(I)~一般式(VI)において、m0、m1、m2、m3、m4、m6は各々0~2の整数を表し、0または1が好ましい。また、m5は1または2を表す。
In the general formula (A), general formula (I) to general formula (VI), m0, m1, m2, m3, m4, and m6 each represents an integer of 0 to 2, and 0 or 1 is preferable. M5 represents 1 or 2.
前記一般式(A)において、L0は、主鎖に酸素原子または硫黄原子を含んでも良い炭素数1~15のr0+1価の連結基あるいは単結合を、前記一般式(I)において、L1は主鎖に酸素原子または硫黄原子を含んでも良い炭素数1~15のr1+1価の連結基あるいは単結合を、前記一般式(II)において、L2は主鎖に酸素原子または硫黄原子を含んでも良い炭素数1~15のr2+1価の連結基あるいは単結合を、前記一般式(III)、前記一般式(IV)において、L3、L4は各々主鎖に酸素原子または硫黄原子を含んでも良い炭素数8の2価の連結基あるいは単結合を表す。
In formula (A), L 0 is the main chain of r0 + 1 valent connecting group or a single bond contain an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom which may having 1 to 15 carbon atoms, the general formula (I), L 1 Is an r1 + 1 valent linking group or a single bond having 1 to 15 carbon atoms which may contain an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom in the main chain. In the general formula (II), L 2 contains an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom in the main chain. In the general formula (III) and the general formula (IV), L 3 and L 4 each may contain an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom in the main chain. However, it represents a divalent linking group having a carbon number of 8 or a single bond.
上記主鎖に酸素原子または硫黄原子を含んでも良い2価の連結基の例としては、以下の列挙する基及びこれらの基と-O-基、-S-基、-CO-基、-CS-基を複数組み合わせてできる基を挙げることができる。
メチレン基[-CH2-]、
エチリデン基[>CHCH3]、
イソプロピリデン[>C(CH3)2]
1,2-エチレン基[-CH2CH2-]、
1,2-プロピレン基[-CH(CH3)CH2-]、
1,3-プロパンジイル基[-CH2CH2CH2-]、
2,2-ジメチル-1,3-プロパンジイル基[-CH2C(CH3)2CH2-]、
2,2-ジメトキシ-1,3-プロパンジイル基[-CH2C(OCH3)2CH2-]、
2,2-ジメトキシメチル-1,3-プロパンジイル基[-CH2C(CH2OCH3)2CH2-]、
1-メチル-1,3-プロパンジイル基[-CH(CH3)CH2CH2-]、
1,4-ブタンジイル基[-CH2CH2CH2CH2-]、
1,5-ペンタンジイル基[-CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2-]、
オキシジエチレン基[-CH2CH2OCH2CH2-]、
チオジエチレン基[-CH2CH2SCH2CH2-]、
3-オキソチオジエチレン基[-CH2CH2SOCH2CH2-]、
3,3-ジオキソチオジエチレン基[-CH2CH2SO2CH2CH2-]、
1,4-ジメチル-3-オキサ-1,5-ペンタンジイル基[-CH(CH3)CH2OCH(CH3)CH2-]、
3-オキソペンタンジイル基[-CH2CH2COCH2CH2-]、
1,5-ジオキソ-3-オキサペンタンジイル基[-COCH2OCH2CO-]、
4-オキサ-1,7-ヘプタンジイル基[-CH2CH2CH2OCH2CH2CH2-]、
3,6-ジオキサ-1,8-オクタンジイル基[-CH2CH2OCH2CH2OCH2CH2-]、
1,4,7-トリメチル-3,6-ジオキサ-1,8-オクタンジイル基[-CH(CH3)CH2OCH(CH3)CH2OCH(CH3)CH2-]、
5,5-ジメチル-3,7-ジオキサ-1,9-ノナンジイル基[-CH2CH2OCH2C(CH3)2CH2OCH2CH2-]、
5,5-ジメトキシ-3,7-ジオキサ-1,9-ノナンジイル基[-CH2CH2OCH2C(OCH3)2CH2OCH2CH2-]、
5,5-ジメトキシメチル-3,7-ジオキサ-1,9-ノナンジイル基[-CH2CH2OCH2C(CH2OCH3)2CH2OCH2CH2-]、
4,7-ジオキソ-3,8-ジオキサ-1,10-デカンジイル基[-CH2CH2O-COCH2CH2CO-OCH2CH2-]、
3,8-ジオキソ-4,7-ジオキサ-1,10-デカンジイル基[-CH2CH2CO-OCH2CH2O-COCH2CH2-]、
1,3-シクロペンタンジイル基[-1,3-C5H8-]、
1,2-シクロヘキサンジイル基[-1,2-C6H10-]、
1,3-シクロヘキサンジイル基[-1,3-C6H10-]、
1,4-シクロヘキサンジイル基[-1,4-C6H10-]、
2,5-テトラヒドロフランジイル基[2,5-C4H6O-]
p-フェニレン基[-p-C6H4-]、
m-フェニレン基[-m-C6H4-]、
α,α′-o-キシリレン基[-o-CH2-C6H4-CH2-]、
α,α′-m-キシリレン基[-m-CH2-C6H4-CH2-]、
α,α′-p-キシリレン基[-p-CH2-C6H4-CH2-]、
フラン-2,5-ジイル-ビスメチレン基[2,5-CH2-C4H2O-CH2-]
チオフェン-2,5-ジイル-ビスメチレン基[2,5-CH2-C4H2S-CH2-]
イソプロピリデンビス-p-フェニレン基[-p-C6H4-C(CH3)2-p-C6H4-]
3価以上の連結基としては、上記で列挙した2価の連結基から任意の部位の水素原子を必要なだけ除いてできる基、及びそれらと-O-基、-S-基、-CO-基、-CS-基を複数組み合わせてできる基を挙げることができる。 Examples of the divalent linking group which may contain an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom in the main chain include the groups listed below, and these groups and —O— group, —S— group, —CO— group, —CS A group formed by combining a plurality of groups.
A methylene group [—CH 2 —],
An ethylidene group [> CHCH 3 ],
Isopropylidene [> C (CH 3 ) 2 ]
1,2-ethylene group [—CH 2 CH 2 —],
1,2-propylene group [—CH (CH 3 ) CH 2 —],
1,3-propanediyl group [—CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 —],
2,2-dimethyl-1,3-propanediyl group [—CH 2 C (CH 3 ) 2 CH 2 —],
2,2-dimethoxy-1,3-propanediyl group [—CH 2 C (OCH 3 ) 2 CH 2 —],
2,2-dimethoxymethyl-1,3-propanediyl group [—CH 2 C (CH 2 OCH 3 ) 2 CH 2 —],
1-methyl-1,3-propanediyl group [—CH (CH 3 ) CH 2 CH 2 —],
1,4-butanediyl group [—CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 —],
1,5-pentanediyl group [—CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 —],
An oxydiethylene group [—CH 2 CH 2 OCH 2 CH 2 —],
A thiodiethylene group [—CH 2 CH 2 SCH 2 CH 2 —],
3-oxothiodiethylene group [—CH 2 CH 2 SOCH 2 CH 2 —],
3,3-dioxothiodiethylene group [—CH 2 CH 2 SO 2 CH 2 CH 2 —],
1,4-dimethyl-3-oxa-1,5-pentanediyl group [—CH (CH 3 ) CH 2 OCH (CH 3 ) CH 2 —],
3-oxopentanediyl group [—CH 2 CH 2 COCH 2 CH 2 —],
1,5-dioxo-3-oxapentanediyl group [—COCH 2 OCH 2 CO—],
4-oxa-1,7-heptanediyl group [—CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 OCH 2 CH 2 CH 2 —],
3,6-dioxa-1,8-octanediyl group [—CH 2 CH 2 OCH 2 CH 2 OCH 2 CH 2 —],
1,4,7-trimethyl-3,6-dioxa-1,8-octanediyl group [—CH (CH 3 ) CH 2 OCH (CH 3 ) CH 2 OCH (CH 3 ) CH 2 —],
5,5-dimethyl-3,7-dioxa-1,9-nonanediyl group [—CH 2 CH 2 OCH 2 C (CH 3 ) 2 CH 2 OCH 2 CH 2 —],
5,5-dimethoxy-3,7-dioxa-1,9-nonanediyl group [—CH 2 CH 2 OCH 2 C (OCH 3 ) 2 CH 2 OCH 2 CH 2 —],
5,5-dimethoxymethyl-3,7-dioxa-1,9-nonanediyl group [—CH 2 CH 2 OCH 2 C (CH 2 OCH 3 ) 2 CH 2 OCH 2 CH 2 —],
4,7-dioxo-3,8-dioxa-1,10-decandiyl group [—CH 2 CH 2 O—COCH 2 CH 2 CO—OCH 2 CH 2 —],
3,8-dioxo-4,7-dioxa-1,10-decandiyl group [—CH 2 CH 2 CO—OCH 2 CH 2 O—COCH 2 CH 2 —],
1,3-cyclopentanediyl group [-1,3-C 5 H 8 —],
1,2-cyclohexanediyl group [-1,2-C 6 H 10- ],
1,3-cyclohexanediyl group [-1,3-C 6 H 10- ],
1,4-cyclohexanediyl group [-1,4-C 6 H 10- ],
2,5-tetrahydrofurandiyl group [2,5-C 4 H 6 O—]
p- phenylene [-p-C 6 H 4 - ],
m- phenylene group [-m-C 6 H 4 - ],
α, α'-o-xylylene group [-o-CH 2 -C 6 H 4 -CH 2- ],
α, α'-m-xylylene group [-m-CH 2 -C 6 H 4 -CH 2- ],
α, α'-p-xylylene group [-p-CH 2 -C 6 H 4 -CH 2- ],
Furan-2,5-diyl-bismethylene group [2,5-CH 2 —C 4 H 2 O—CH 2 —]
Thiophene-2,5-diyl-bismethylene group [2,5-CH 2 —C 4 H 2 S—CH 2 —]
Isopropylidenebis -p- phenylene group [-p-C 6 H 4 -C (CH 3) 2 -p-C 6 H 4 -]
Examples of the trivalent or higher linking group include groups formed by removing as many hydrogen atoms as necessary from the divalent linking groups listed above, an —O— group, an —S— group, —CO— And a group formed by combining a plurality of groups and —CS— groups.
メチレン基[-CH2-]、
エチリデン基[>CHCH3]、
イソプロピリデン[>C(CH3)2]
1,2-エチレン基[-CH2CH2-]、
1,2-プロピレン基[-CH(CH3)CH2-]、
1,3-プロパンジイル基[-CH2CH2CH2-]、
2,2-ジメチル-1,3-プロパンジイル基[-CH2C(CH3)2CH2-]、
2,2-ジメトキシ-1,3-プロパンジイル基[-CH2C(OCH3)2CH2-]、
2,2-ジメトキシメチル-1,3-プロパンジイル基[-CH2C(CH2OCH3)2CH2-]、
1-メチル-1,3-プロパンジイル基[-CH(CH3)CH2CH2-]、
1,4-ブタンジイル基[-CH2CH2CH2CH2-]、
1,5-ペンタンジイル基[-CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2-]、
オキシジエチレン基[-CH2CH2OCH2CH2-]、
チオジエチレン基[-CH2CH2SCH2CH2-]、
3-オキソチオジエチレン基[-CH2CH2SOCH2CH2-]、
3,3-ジオキソチオジエチレン基[-CH2CH2SO2CH2CH2-]、
1,4-ジメチル-3-オキサ-1,5-ペンタンジイル基[-CH(CH3)CH2OCH(CH3)CH2-]、
3-オキソペンタンジイル基[-CH2CH2COCH2CH2-]、
1,5-ジオキソ-3-オキサペンタンジイル基[-COCH2OCH2CO-]、
4-オキサ-1,7-ヘプタンジイル基[-CH2CH2CH2OCH2CH2CH2-]、
3,6-ジオキサ-1,8-オクタンジイル基[-CH2CH2OCH2CH2OCH2CH2-]、
1,4,7-トリメチル-3,6-ジオキサ-1,8-オクタンジイル基[-CH(CH3)CH2OCH(CH3)CH2OCH(CH3)CH2-]、
5,5-ジメチル-3,7-ジオキサ-1,9-ノナンジイル基[-CH2CH2OCH2C(CH3)2CH2OCH2CH2-]、
5,5-ジメトキシ-3,7-ジオキサ-1,9-ノナンジイル基[-CH2CH2OCH2C(OCH3)2CH2OCH2CH2-]、
5,5-ジメトキシメチル-3,7-ジオキサ-1,9-ノナンジイル基[-CH2CH2OCH2C(CH2OCH3)2CH2OCH2CH2-]、
4,7-ジオキソ-3,8-ジオキサ-1,10-デカンジイル基[-CH2CH2O-COCH2CH2CO-OCH2CH2-]、
3,8-ジオキソ-4,7-ジオキサ-1,10-デカンジイル基[-CH2CH2CO-OCH2CH2O-COCH2CH2-]、
1,3-シクロペンタンジイル基[-1,3-C5H8-]、
1,2-シクロヘキサンジイル基[-1,2-C6H10-]、
1,3-シクロヘキサンジイル基[-1,3-C6H10-]、
1,4-シクロヘキサンジイル基[-1,4-C6H10-]、
2,5-テトラヒドロフランジイル基[2,5-C4H6O-]
p-フェニレン基[-p-C6H4-]、
m-フェニレン基[-m-C6H4-]、
α,α′-o-キシリレン基[-o-CH2-C6H4-CH2-]、
α,α′-m-キシリレン基[-m-CH2-C6H4-CH2-]、
α,α′-p-キシリレン基[-p-CH2-C6H4-CH2-]、
フラン-2,5-ジイル-ビスメチレン基[2,5-CH2-C4H2O-CH2-]
チオフェン-2,5-ジイル-ビスメチレン基[2,5-CH2-C4H2S-CH2-]
イソプロピリデンビス-p-フェニレン基[-p-C6H4-C(CH3)2-p-C6H4-]
3価以上の連結基としては、上記で列挙した2価の連結基から任意の部位の水素原子を必要なだけ除いてできる基、及びそれらと-O-基、-S-基、-CO-基、-CS-基を複数組み合わせてできる基を挙げることができる。 Examples of the divalent linking group which may contain an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom in the main chain include the groups listed below, and these groups and —O— group, —S— group, —CO— group, —CS A group formed by combining a plurality of groups.
A methylene group [—CH 2 —],
An ethylidene group [> CHCH 3 ],
Isopropylidene [> C (CH 3 ) 2 ]
1,2-ethylene group [—CH 2 CH 2 —],
1,2-propylene group [—CH (CH 3 ) CH 2 —],
1,3-propanediyl group [—CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 —],
2,2-dimethyl-1,3-propanediyl group [—CH 2 C (CH 3 ) 2 CH 2 —],
2,2-dimethoxy-1,3-propanediyl group [—CH 2 C (OCH 3 ) 2 CH 2 —],
2,2-dimethoxymethyl-1,3-propanediyl group [—CH 2 C (CH 2 OCH 3 ) 2 CH 2 —],
1-methyl-1,3-propanediyl group [—CH (CH 3 ) CH 2 CH 2 —],
1,4-butanediyl group [—CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 —],
1,5-pentanediyl group [—CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 —],
An oxydiethylene group [—CH 2 CH 2 OCH 2 CH 2 —],
A thiodiethylene group [—CH 2 CH 2 SCH 2 CH 2 —],
3-oxothiodiethylene group [—CH 2 CH 2 SOCH 2 CH 2 —],
3,3-dioxothiodiethylene group [—CH 2 CH 2 SO 2 CH 2 CH 2 —],
1,4-dimethyl-3-oxa-1,5-pentanediyl group [—CH (CH 3 ) CH 2 OCH (CH 3 ) CH 2 —],
3-oxopentanediyl group [—CH 2 CH 2 COCH 2 CH 2 —],
1,5-dioxo-3-oxapentanediyl group [—COCH 2 OCH 2 CO—],
4-oxa-1,7-heptanediyl group [—CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 OCH 2 CH 2 CH 2 —],
3,6-dioxa-1,8-octanediyl group [—CH 2 CH 2 OCH 2 CH 2 OCH 2 CH 2 —],
1,4,7-trimethyl-3,6-dioxa-1,8-octanediyl group [—CH (CH 3 ) CH 2 OCH (CH 3 ) CH 2 OCH (CH 3 ) CH 2 —],
5,5-dimethyl-3,7-dioxa-1,9-nonanediyl group [—CH 2 CH 2 OCH 2 C (CH 3 ) 2 CH 2 OCH 2 CH 2 —],
5,5-dimethoxy-3,7-dioxa-1,9-nonanediyl group [—CH 2 CH 2 OCH 2 C (OCH 3 ) 2 CH 2 OCH 2 CH 2 —],
5,5-dimethoxymethyl-3,7-dioxa-1,9-nonanediyl group [—CH 2 CH 2 OCH 2 C (CH 2 OCH 3 ) 2 CH 2 OCH 2 CH 2 —],
4,7-dioxo-3,8-dioxa-1,10-decandiyl group [—CH 2 CH 2 O—COCH 2 CH 2 CO—OCH 2 CH 2 —],
3,8-dioxo-4,7-dioxa-1,10-decandiyl group [—CH 2 CH 2 CO—OCH 2 CH 2 O—COCH 2 CH 2 —],
1,3-cyclopentanediyl group [-1,3-C 5 H 8 —],
1,2-cyclohexanediyl group [-1,2-C 6 H 10- ],
1,3-cyclohexanediyl group [-1,3-C 6 H 10- ],
1,4-cyclohexanediyl group [-1,4-C 6 H 10- ],
2,5-tetrahydrofurandiyl group [2,5-C 4 H 6 O—]
p- phenylene [-p-C 6 H 4 - ],
m- phenylene group [-m-C 6 H 4 - ],
α, α'-o-xylylene group [-o-CH 2 -C 6 H 4 -CH 2- ],
α, α'-m-xylylene group [-m-CH 2 -C 6 H 4 -CH 2- ],
α, α'-p-xylylene group [-p-CH 2 -C 6 H 4 -CH 2- ],
Furan-2,5-diyl-bismethylene group [2,5-CH 2 —C 4 H 2 O—CH 2 —]
Thiophene-2,5-diyl-bismethylene group [2,5-CH 2 —C 4 H 2 S—CH 2 —]
Isopropylidenebis -p- phenylene group [-p-C 6 H 4 -C (CH 3) 2 -p-C 6 H 4 -]
Examples of the trivalent or higher linking group include groups formed by removing as many hydrogen atoms as necessary from the divalent linking groups listed above, an —O— group, an —S— group, —CO— And a group formed by combining a plurality of groups and —CS— groups.
L0、L1、L2、L3、L4は各々置換基を有していても良い。置換基の例としては、ハロゲン原子(例えば、塩素原子、臭素原子、フッ素原子等)、炭素数1~6個のアルキル基(例えば、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、イソプロピル基、ブチル基等)、炭素数1~6個のアルコキシ基(例えば、メトキシ基、エトキシ基、n-プロポキシ基、iso-プロポキシ基、n-ブトキシ基、tert-ブトキシ基等)、アシル基(例えば、アセチル基、プロピオニル基、トリフルオロアセチル基等)、アシルオキシ基(例えば、アセトキシ基、プロピオニルオキシ基、トリフルオロアセトキシ基等)、アルコキシカルボニル基(例えば、メトキシカルボニル基、エトキシカルボニル基、tert-ブトキシカルボニル基等)等が挙げられる。置換基として好ましいのは、アルキル基、アルコキシ基、またはアルコキシカルボニル基である。
L 0 , L 1 , L 2 , L 3 and L 4 may each have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom (eg, chlorine atom, bromine atom, fluorine atom), an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms (eg, methyl group, ethyl group, propyl group, isopropyl group, butyl group, etc.) ), An alkoxy group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms (for example, methoxy group, ethoxy group, n-propoxy group, iso-propoxy group, n-butoxy group, tert-butoxy group, etc.), acyl group (for example, acetyl group, Propionyl group, trifluoroacetyl group, etc.), acyloxy group (eg, acetoxy group, propionyloxy group, trifluoroacetoxy group, etc.), alkoxycarbonyl group (eg, methoxycarbonyl group, ethoxycarbonyl group, tert-butoxycarbonyl group, etc.) Etc. Preferred as a substituent is an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, or an alkoxycarbonyl group.
L0、L1、L2としては、主鎖に酸素原子または硫黄原子を含んでも良い炭素数1~8の2価の連結基が好ましく、あるいはL0、L1、L2、L3、L4としては各々主鎖が炭素のみからなる炭素数1~5の2価の連結基がより好ましい。
L 0 , L 1 and L 2 are preferably divalent linking groups having 1 to 8 carbon atoms which may contain an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom in the main chain, or L 0 , L 1 , L 2 , L 3 , L 4 is more preferably a divalent linking group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms each having a main chain composed of only carbon.
p1、q1は各々0または1を表し、p1+q1が1以上であることが好ましい。p2、q2は各々0または1を表し、各々1が好ましい。p3、p4は各々0または1を表す。
P1 and q1 each represents 0 or 1, and p1 + q1 is preferably 1 or more. p2 and q2 each represents 0 or 1, each preferably 1; p3 and p4 each represents 0 or 1.
以下に、好ましい脂環式エポキシドの具体例を示すが、本発明はこれらに限定されるものではない。
Specific examples of preferred alicyclic epoxides are shown below, but the present invention is not limited thereto.
本発明に係る上記各脂環式エポキシド化合物においては、分子量を分子内のエポキシ基の総数で除した数値が160以上、300以下であることが好ましい。
In each of the above alicyclic epoxide compounds according to the present invention, a value obtained by dividing the molecular weight by the total number of epoxy groups in the molecule is preferably 160 or more and 300 or less.
本発明に係る前記一般式(A)、一般式(I)~一般式(VI)で表される脂環式エポキシド化合物の合成は、例えば、以下に列挙する特許明細書に記載の方法に準じて行うことができる。
A:米国特許2,745,847号明細書
B:米国特許2,750,395号明細書
C:米国特許2,853,498号明細書
D:米国特許2,853,499号明細書
E:米国特許2,863,881号明細書
以下に、上記特許明細書に記載されている方法に準じて、上記例示化合物の合成例の一例を以下に示すが、本発明はこれらに限定されるものではない。
〔合成例1〕
例示化合物EP-9:Ethylenglycol-bis-(4-methyl-3,4-epoxy-cyclohexanecarboxylate)の合成
〈Methyl-(4-methyl-3-cyclohexenecarboxylate)の合成〉
公知のDiels-Alder反応によって、イソプレンとアクリル酸メチルを原料に、Methyl-(4-methyl-3-cyclohexenecarboxylate)を合成した。反応は、文献(J.Organomet.Chem.,285,1985,333-342、J.Phys.Chem.,95,5,1992,2293-2297、Acta.Chem.Scand.,47,6,1993,581-591)あるいは米国特許第1,944,731号明細書等に記載された条件に準じた反応条件で行ない、高収率で目的の化合物を得た。
〈Ethylenglycol-bis-(4-methyl-3-cyclohexenecarboxylate)の合成〉
Methyl-(4-methyl-3-cyclohexenecarboxylate)の340g(2mol)と、エチレングリコール62g(1mol)とにトルエンスルホン酸1水和物1gを添加し、80~90℃で8時間反応した。反応液を重曹水で洗浄した後、減圧蒸留を行い、目的の化合物を得た。収率は92%だった。
〈例示化合物EP-9の合成〉
Ethylenglycol-bis-(4-methyl-3-cyclohexenecarboxylate)の306g(1mol)を2Lの三頭フラスコに入れ、内温を35~40℃に保ったまま、過酢酸含有率が25質量%のアセトン溶液770g(過酢酸192g(2.5mol))を4時間かけて滴下した。滴下終了後、そのままの温度で4時間後反応した。反応液は-11℃で一晩保存した後、過酢酸の残量を調べ理論量の98%以上が反応していることを確認した。 The synthesis of the alicyclic epoxide compounds represented by the general formula (A), the general formula (I) to the general formula (VI) according to the present invention is performed, for example, according to the methods described in the patent specifications listed below. Can be done.
A: US Pat. No. 2,745,847 B: US Pat. No. 2,750,395 C: US Pat. No. 2,853,498 D: US Pat. No. 2,853,499 Specification E: US Pat. No. 2,863,881 In the following, examples of the synthesis of the above exemplified compounds are shown below according to the methods described in the above patent specifications, but the present invention is not limited thereto. is not.
[Synthesis Example 1]
Exemplary Compound EP-9: Synthesis of Ethylglycol-bis- (4-methyl-3,4-epoxy-cyclohexanecarboxylate) <Synthesis of Methyl- (4-methyl-3-cyclocarboxylate)>
Methyl- (4-methyl-3-cyclohexanecarbylate) was synthesized from isoprene and methyl acrylate by known Diels-Alder reactions. Reactions are described in the literature (J. Organomet. Chem., 285, 1985, 333-342, J. Phys. Chem., 95, 5, 1992, 2293-2297, Acta. Chem. Scand., 47, 6, 1993, 581-591) or reaction conditions according to the conditions described in US Pat. No. 1,944,731, etc., and the target compound was obtained in high yield.
<Synthesis of Ethyleneglycol-bis- (4-methyl-3-cyclohexanecarbylate)>
1 g of toluenesulfonic acid monohydrate was added to 340 g (2 mol) of methyl- (4-methyl-3-cyclohexanecarboxylate) and 62 g (1 mol) of ethylene glycol, and reacted at 80 to 90 ° C. for 8 hours. The reaction solution was washed with aqueous sodium bicarbonate and then distilled under reduced pressure to obtain the target compound. The yield was 92%.
<Synthesis of Exemplified Compound EP-9>
306 g (1 mol) of ethylglycol-bis- (4-methyl-3-cyclohexanecarbylate) is placed in a 2 L three-headed flask, and an acetone solution with a peracetic acid content of 25% by mass is maintained at 35-40 ° C. 770 g (192 g (2.5 mol) peracetic acid) was added dropwise over 4 hours. After completion of the dropwise addition, the reaction was carried out after 4 hours at the same temperature. The reaction solution was stored at −11 ° C. overnight, and the remaining amount of peracetic acid was examined to confirm that 98% or more of the theoretical amount had reacted.
A:米国特許2,745,847号明細書
B:米国特許2,750,395号明細書
C:米国特許2,853,498号明細書
D:米国特許2,853,499号明細書
E:米国特許2,863,881号明細書
以下に、上記特許明細書に記載されている方法に準じて、上記例示化合物の合成例の一例を以下に示すが、本発明はこれらに限定されるものではない。
〔合成例1〕
例示化合物EP-9:Ethylenglycol-bis-(4-methyl-3,4-epoxy-cyclohexanecarboxylate)の合成
〈Methyl-(4-methyl-3-cyclohexenecarboxylate)の合成〉
公知のDiels-Alder反応によって、イソプレンとアクリル酸メチルを原料に、Methyl-(4-methyl-3-cyclohexenecarboxylate)を合成した。反応は、文献(J.Organomet.Chem.,285,1985,333-342、J.Phys.Chem.,95,5,1992,2293-2297、Acta.Chem.Scand.,47,6,1993,581-591)あるいは米国特許第1,944,731号明細書等に記載された条件に準じた反応条件で行ない、高収率で目的の化合物を得た。
〈Ethylenglycol-bis-(4-methyl-3-cyclohexenecarboxylate)の合成〉
Methyl-(4-methyl-3-cyclohexenecarboxylate)の340g(2mol)と、エチレングリコール62g(1mol)とにトルエンスルホン酸1水和物1gを添加し、80~90℃で8時間反応した。反応液を重曹水で洗浄した後、減圧蒸留を行い、目的の化合物を得た。収率は92%だった。
〈例示化合物EP-9の合成〉
Ethylenglycol-bis-(4-methyl-3-cyclohexenecarboxylate)の306g(1mol)を2Lの三頭フラスコに入れ、内温を35~40℃に保ったまま、過酢酸含有率が25質量%のアセトン溶液770g(過酢酸192g(2.5mol))を4時間かけて滴下した。滴下終了後、そのままの温度で4時間後反応した。反応液は-11℃で一晩保存した後、過酢酸の残量を調べ理論量の98%以上が反応していることを確認した。 The synthesis of the alicyclic epoxide compounds represented by the general formula (A), the general formula (I) to the general formula (VI) according to the present invention is performed, for example, according to the methods described in the patent specifications listed below. Can be done.
A: US Pat. No. 2,745,847 B: US Pat. No. 2,750,395 C: US Pat. No. 2,853,498 D: US Pat. No. 2,853,499 Specification E: US Pat. No. 2,863,881 In the following, examples of the synthesis of the above exemplified compounds are shown below according to the methods described in the above patent specifications, but the present invention is not limited thereto. is not.
[Synthesis Example 1]
Exemplary Compound EP-9: Synthesis of Ethylglycol-bis- (4-methyl-3,4-epoxy-cyclohexanecarboxylate) <Synthesis of Methyl- (4-methyl-3-cyclocarboxylate)>
Methyl- (4-methyl-3-cyclohexanecarbylate) was synthesized from isoprene and methyl acrylate by known Diels-Alder reactions. Reactions are described in the literature (J. Organomet. Chem., 285, 1985, 333-342, J. Phys. Chem., 95, 5, 1992, 2293-2297, Acta. Chem. Scand., 47, 6, 1993, 581-591) or reaction conditions according to the conditions described in US Pat. No. 1,944,731, etc., and the target compound was obtained in high yield.
<Synthesis of Ethyleneglycol-bis- (4-methyl-3-cyclohexanecarbylate)>
1 g of toluenesulfonic acid monohydrate was added to 340 g (2 mol) of methyl- (4-methyl-3-cyclohexanecarboxylate) and 62 g (1 mol) of ethylene glycol, and reacted at 80 to 90 ° C. for 8 hours. The reaction solution was washed with aqueous sodium bicarbonate and then distilled under reduced pressure to obtain the target compound. The yield was 92%.
<Synthesis of Exemplified Compound EP-9>
306 g (1 mol) of ethylglycol-bis- (4-methyl-3-cyclohexanecarbylate) is placed in a 2 L three-headed flask, and an acetone solution with a peracetic acid content of 25% by mass is maintained at 35-40 ° C. 770 g (192 g (2.5 mol) peracetic acid) was added dropwise over 4 hours. After completion of the dropwise addition, the reaction was carried out after 4 hours at the same temperature. The reaction solution was stored at −11 ° C. overnight, and the remaining amount of peracetic acid was examined to confirm that 98% or more of the theoretical amount had reacted.
次いで、反応液をトルエン1Lで希釈し、水流アスピレーターによる減圧下で50℃に加熱し溜出物がなくなるまで低沸点成分を溜去し除去した。残った反応組成物を減圧蒸留し、目的の例示化合物EP-9を得た。収率は78%であった。
Next, the reaction solution was diluted with 1 L of toluene, heated to 50 ° C. under reduced pressure using a water aspirator, and the low-boiling components were distilled off and removed until the distillate disappeared. The remaining reaction composition was distilled under reduced pressure to obtain the target exemplified compound EP-9. The yield was 78%.
得られた例示化合物EP-9の構造は、NMR、MASS分析で確認した。
1H NMR(CDCl3) δ(ppm):1.31(s,6H,CH3-)、1.45~2.50(m,14H,シクロヘキサン環)、3.10(m,2H,エポキシ根元)、4.10(s,4H,-CH2-O-)
〔合成例2〕
例示化合物EP-12:Propane-1,2-diol-bis-(4-methyl-3,4-epoxy-cyclohexanecarboxylate)の合成
〈Propane-1,2-diol-bis-(4-methyl-3-cyclohexenecarboxylate)の合成〉
Methyl-(4-methyl-3-cyclohexenecarboxylate)の340g(2mol)と、Propane-1,2-diolの76g(1mol)にトルエンスルホン酸1水和物1gを添加し、80~90℃で8時間反応した。反応液を重曹水で洗浄した後、減圧蒸留を行い目的の化合物を得た。収率は90%だった。
〈例示化合物EP-12の合成〉
Propane-1,2-diol-bis-(4-methyl-3-cyclohexenecarboxylate)の320g(1mol)を2Lの三頭フラスコに入れ、内温を35~40℃に保ったまま、過酢酸含有率が25質量%のアセトン溶液770g(過酢酸192g(2.5mol))を4時間かけて滴下した。滴下終了後、そのままの温度で4時間後反応した。反応液は-11℃で一晩保存した後、過酢酸の残量を調べ理論量の98%以上が反応していることを確認した。 The structure of the obtained exemplary compound EP-9 was confirmed by NMR and MASS analysis.
1H NMR (CDCl 3 ) δ (ppm): 1.31 (s, 6H, CH 3 —), 1.45 to 2.50 (m, 14H, cyclohexane ring), 3.10 (m, 2H, epoxy root) ), 4.10 (s, 4H, —CH 2 —O—)
[Synthesis Example 2]
Exemplary Compound EP-12: Synthesis of Propane-1,2-diol-bis- (4-methyl-3,4-epoxy-cyclohexanecarboxylate) <Propane-1,2-diol-bis- (4-methyl-3-cyclohexanecarboxylate) )
1 g of toluenesulfonic acid monohydrate was added to 340 g (2 mol) of Methyl- (4-methyl-3-cyclohexanecarboxylate) and 76 g (1 mol) of Propane-1,2-diol at 80 to 90 ° C. for 8 hours. Reacted. The reaction solution was washed with aqueous sodium bicarbonate, and then distilled under reduced pressure to obtain the target compound. The yield was 90%.
<Synthesis of Exemplified Compound EP-12>
Propane-1,2-diol-bis- (4-methyl-3-cyclohexenecarboxylate) 320 g (1 mol) was put into a 2 L three-headed flask, and the peracetic acid content was kept at 35 to 40 ° C. 770 g of a 25 mass% acetone solution (192 g (2.5 mol) of peracetic acid) was added dropwise over 4 hours. After completion of the dropwise addition, the reaction was carried out after 4 hours at the same temperature. The reaction solution was stored at −11 ° C. overnight, and the remaining amount of peracetic acid was examined to confirm that 98% or more of the theoretical amount had reacted.
1H NMR(CDCl3) δ(ppm):1.31(s,6H,CH3-)、1.45~2.50(m,14H,シクロヘキサン環)、3.10(m,2H,エポキシ根元)、4.10(s,4H,-CH2-O-)
〔合成例2〕
例示化合物EP-12:Propane-1,2-diol-bis-(4-methyl-3,4-epoxy-cyclohexanecarboxylate)の合成
〈Propane-1,2-diol-bis-(4-methyl-3-cyclohexenecarboxylate)の合成〉
Methyl-(4-methyl-3-cyclohexenecarboxylate)の340g(2mol)と、Propane-1,2-diolの76g(1mol)にトルエンスルホン酸1水和物1gを添加し、80~90℃で8時間反応した。反応液を重曹水で洗浄した後、減圧蒸留を行い目的の化合物を得た。収率は90%だった。
〈例示化合物EP-12の合成〉
Propane-1,2-diol-bis-(4-methyl-3-cyclohexenecarboxylate)の320g(1mol)を2Lの三頭フラスコに入れ、内温を35~40℃に保ったまま、過酢酸含有率が25質量%のアセトン溶液770g(過酢酸192g(2.5mol))を4時間かけて滴下した。滴下終了後、そのままの温度で4時間後反応した。反応液は-11℃で一晩保存した後、過酢酸の残量を調べ理論量の98%以上が反応していることを確認した。 The structure of the obtained exemplary compound EP-9 was confirmed by NMR and MASS analysis.
1H NMR (CDCl 3 ) δ (ppm): 1.31 (s, 6H, CH 3 —), 1.45 to 2.50 (m, 14H, cyclohexane ring), 3.10 (m, 2H, epoxy root) ), 4.10 (s, 4H, —CH 2 —O—)
[Synthesis Example 2]
Exemplary Compound EP-12: Synthesis of Propane-1,2-diol-bis- (4-methyl-3,4-epoxy-cyclohexanecarboxylate) <Propane-1,2-diol-bis- (4-methyl-3-cyclohexanecarboxylate) )
1 g of toluenesulfonic acid monohydrate was added to 340 g (2 mol) of Methyl- (4-methyl-3-cyclohexanecarboxylate) and 76 g (1 mol) of Propane-1,2-diol at 80 to 90 ° C. for 8 hours. Reacted. The reaction solution was washed with aqueous sodium bicarbonate, and then distilled under reduced pressure to obtain the target compound. The yield was 90%.
<Synthesis of Exemplified Compound EP-12>
Propane-1,2-diol-bis- (4-methyl-3-cyclohexenecarboxylate) 320 g (1 mol) was put into a 2 L three-headed flask, and the peracetic acid content was kept at 35 to 40 ° C. 770 g of a 25 mass% acetone solution (192 g (2.5 mol) of peracetic acid) was added dropwise over 4 hours. After completion of the dropwise addition, the reaction was carried out after 4 hours at the same temperature. The reaction solution was stored at −11 ° C. overnight, and the remaining amount of peracetic acid was examined to confirm that 98% or more of the theoretical amount had reacted.
次いで、反応液をトルエン1Lで希釈し、水流アスピレーターによる減圧下で50℃に加熱し溜出物がなくなるまで低沸点成分を溜去し除去した。
Next, the reaction solution was diluted with 1 L of toluene, heated to 50 ° C. under reduced pressure using a water aspirator, and the low-boiling components were distilled off and removed until the distillate disappeared.
残った反応組成物を減圧蒸留し、目的の例示化合物EP-12を得た。収率は75%だった。
The remaining reaction composition was distilled under reduced pressure to obtain the target exemplified compound EP-12. The yield was 75%.
得られた例示化合物EP-12の構造は、NMR、MASS分析で確認した。1HNMR (CDCl3) δ(ppm):1.23(d,3H,CH3-)、1.31(s,6H,CH3-)、1.45~2.50(m,14H,シクロヘキサン環)、3.15(m,2H,エポキシ根元)、4.03(m,1H,-O-CH2-)、4.18(m,1H,-O-CH2-)、5.15(m,1H,>CH-O-)
〔合成例3〕
例示化合物EP-17:2,2-Dimethyl-propane-1,3-diol-bis-(4-methyl-3,4-epoxy-cyclohexanecarboxylate)の合成
〈2,2-Dimethyl-propane-1,3-diol-bis-(4-methyl-3-cyclohexenecarboxylate)の合成〉
Methyl-(4-methyl-3-cyclohexenecarboxylate)の340g(2mol)と、2,2-Dimethyl-propane-1,3-diolの104g(1mol)とに、トルエンスルホン酸1水和物1gを添加し80~90℃で12時間反応した。反応液を重曹水で洗浄した後、減圧蒸留を行い目的の化合物を得た。収率は86%だった。
〈例示化合物EP-17の合成〉
2,2-Dimethyl-propane-1,3-diol-bis-(4-methyl-3-cyclohexenecarboxylate)の348g(1mol)を2Lの三頭フラスコに入れ、内温を40℃に保ったまま、過酢酸含有率が25質量%のアセトン溶液770g(過酢酸192g(2.5mol))を4時間かけて滴下した。滴下終了後、そのままの温度で4時間後反応した。反応液は-11℃で一晩保存した後、過酢酸の残量を調べ理論量の98%以上が反応していることを確認した。 The structure of the obtained exemplary compound EP-12 was confirmed by NMR and MASS analysis. 1HNMR (CDCl 3 ) δ (ppm): 1.23 (d, 3H, CH 3 —), 1.31 (s, 6H, CH 3 —), 1.45 to 2.50 (m, 14H, cyclohexane ring) ), 3.15 (m, 2H, epoxy base), 4.03 (m, 1H, —O—CH 2 —), 4.18 (m, 1H, —O—CH 2 —), 5.15 ( m, 1H,> CH-O-)
[Synthesis Example 3]
Synthesis of Exemplified Compound EP-17: 2,2-Dimethyl-propane-1,3-diol-bis- (4-methyl-3,4-epoxy-cyclohexanecarboxylate) <2,2-Dimethyl-propane-1,3- Synthesis of diol-bis- (4-methyl-3-cyclohexenecarboxylate)>
1 g of toluenesulfonic acid monohydrate was added to 340 g (2 mol) of methyl- (4-methyl-3-cyclohexanecarboxylate) and 104 g (1 mol) of 2,2-dimethyl-propane-1,3-diol. The reaction was carried out at 80 to 90 ° C. for 12 hours. The reaction solution was washed with aqueous sodium bicarbonate, and then distilled under reduced pressure to obtain the target compound. The yield was 86%.
<Synthesis of Exemplified Compound EP-17>
348 g (1 mol) of 2,2-Dimethyl-propane-1,3-diol-bis- (4-methyl-3-cyclohexanecarbylate) was placed in a 2 L three-headed flask, and the internal temperature was kept at 40 ° C. 770 g of an acetone solution having an acetic acid content of 25% by mass (192 g (2.5 mol) of peracetic acid) was added dropwise over 4 hours. After completion of the dropwise addition, the reaction was carried out after 4 hours at the same temperature. The reaction solution was stored at −11 ° C. overnight, and the remaining amount of peracetic acid was examined to confirm that 98% or more of the theoretical amount had reacted.
〔合成例3〕
例示化合物EP-17:2,2-Dimethyl-propane-1,3-diol-bis-(4-methyl-3,4-epoxy-cyclohexanecarboxylate)の合成
〈2,2-Dimethyl-propane-1,3-diol-bis-(4-methyl-3-cyclohexenecarboxylate)の合成〉
Methyl-(4-methyl-3-cyclohexenecarboxylate)の340g(2mol)と、2,2-Dimethyl-propane-1,3-diolの104g(1mol)とに、トルエンスルホン酸1水和物1gを添加し80~90℃で12時間反応した。反応液を重曹水で洗浄した後、減圧蒸留を行い目的の化合物を得た。収率は86%だった。
〈例示化合物EP-17の合成〉
2,2-Dimethyl-propane-1,3-diol-bis-(4-methyl-3-cyclohexenecarboxylate)の348g(1mol)を2Lの三頭フラスコに入れ、内温を40℃に保ったまま、過酢酸含有率が25質量%のアセトン溶液770g(過酢酸192g(2.5mol))を4時間かけて滴下した。滴下終了後、そのままの温度で4時間後反応した。反応液は-11℃で一晩保存した後、過酢酸の残量を調べ理論量の98%以上が反応していることを確認した。 The structure of the obtained exemplary compound EP-12 was confirmed by NMR and MASS analysis. 1HNMR (CDCl 3 ) δ (ppm): 1.23 (d, 3H, CH 3 —), 1.31 (s, 6H, CH 3 —), 1.45 to 2.50 (m, 14H, cyclohexane ring) ), 3.15 (m, 2H, epoxy base), 4.03 (m, 1H, —O—CH 2 —), 4.18 (m, 1H, —O—CH 2 —), 5.15 ( m, 1H,> CH-O-)
[Synthesis Example 3]
Synthesis of Exemplified Compound EP-17: 2,2-Dimethyl-propane-1,3-diol-bis- (4-methyl-3,4-epoxy-cyclohexanecarboxylate) <2,2-Dimethyl-propane-1,3- Synthesis of diol-bis- (4-methyl-3-cyclohexenecarboxylate)>
1 g of toluenesulfonic acid monohydrate was added to 340 g (2 mol) of methyl- (4-methyl-3-cyclohexanecarboxylate) and 104 g (1 mol) of 2,2-dimethyl-propane-1,3-diol. The reaction was carried out at 80 to 90 ° C. for 12 hours. The reaction solution was washed with aqueous sodium bicarbonate, and then distilled under reduced pressure to obtain the target compound. The yield was 86%.
<Synthesis of Exemplified Compound EP-17>
348 g (1 mol) of 2,2-Dimethyl-propane-1,3-diol-bis- (4-methyl-3-cyclohexanecarbylate) was placed in a 2 L three-headed flask, and the internal temperature was kept at 40 ° C. 770 g of an acetone solution having an acetic acid content of 25% by mass (192 g (2.5 mol) of peracetic acid) was added dropwise over 4 hours. After completion of the dropwise addition, the reaction was carried out after 4 hours at the same temperature. The reaction solution was stored at −11 ° C. overnight, and the remaining amount of peracetic acid was examined to confirm that 98% or more of the theoretical amount had reacted.
次いで、反応液をトルエン1Lで希釈し、水流アスピレーターによる減圧下で50℃に加熱し溜出物がなくなるまで低沸点成分を溜去し除去した。
Next, the reaction solution was diluted with 1 L of toluene, heated to 50 ° C. under reduced pressure using a water aspirator, and the low-boiling components were distilled off and removed until the distillate disappeared.
残った反応組成物を減圧蒸留し、目的の例示化合物EP-17を得た。収率は70%だった。
The remaining reaction composition was distilled under reduced pressure to obtain the target exemplified compound EP-17. The yield was 70%.
例示化合物EP-17の構造は、NMR、MASS分析で確認した。
1H NMR(CDCl3) δ(ppm):0.96(s,6H,CH3-)、1.31(s,6H,CH3-)、1.45~2.50(m,14H,シクロヘキサン環)、3.00(m,2H,エポキシ根元)、3.87(s,4H,-O-CH2-)
〔合成例4〕
例示化合物EP-31:1,3-Bis-(4-methyl-3,4-epoxy-cyclohexylmethyloxy)-2-propanolの合成
〈4-Methyl-3-cyclohexenylmethanolの合成〉
公知のDiels-Alder反応によって、イソプレンとアクロレインを原料に、4-Methyl-3-cyclohexenylaldehydeを合成した。反応は、文献(J.Amer.Chem.Soc.,119,15,1997,3507-3512、TetrahedronLett.,40,32,1999,5817-5822)等に記載された条件に準じた反応条件で行ない、高収率で目的の化合物を得た。次いで、この化合物を還元することで4-Methyl-3-cyclohexenylmethanolを高収率で合成した。
〈1,2-Bis-(4-methyl-3-cyclohexenylmethyloxy)-2-propanolの合成〉
4-Methyl-3-cyclohexenylmethanolの284g(2mol)と、エピクロルヒドリンを92g(1mol)含むアセトン1L溶液に炭酸カリウムを305g(2.2mol)添加し、50℃で8時間反応した。析出した塩をろ過によって除去し、反応液を減圧濃縮した後、残った粗生物の減圧蒸留を行い目的の化合物を得た。収率は90%だった。
〈例示化合物EP-31の合成〉
1,2-Bis-(4-methyl-3-cyclohexenylmethyloxy)-2-propanolの308g(1mol)を2Lの三頭フラスコに入れ、内温を35~40℃に保ったまま、過酢酸含有率が25質量%のアセトン溶液770g(過酢酸192g(2.5mol))を4時間かけて滴下した。滴下終了後、そのままの温度で4時間後反応した。反応液は-11℃で一晩保存した後、過酢酸の残量を調べ理論量の98%以上が反応していることを確認した。 The structure of Exemplified Compound EP-17 was confirmed by NMR and MASS analysis.
1H NMR (CDCl 3 ) δ (ppm): 0.96 (s, 6H, CH 3 —), 1.31 (s, 6H, CH 3 —), 1.45 to 2.50 (m, 14H, cyclohexane) Ring), 3.00 (m, 2H, epoxy root), 3.87 (s, 4H, —O—CH 2 —)
[Synthesis Example 4]
Synthesis of Exemplary Compound EP-31: 1,3-Bis- (4-methyl-3,4-epoxy-cyclohexylmethyl) -2-propanol <Synthesis of 4-Methyl-3-cyclohexenylmethyl>
4-Methyl-3-cyclohexenyldehydride was synthesized from isoprene and acrolein by known Diels-Alder reactions. The reaction is performed under the reaction conditions according to the conditions described in the literature (J. Amer. Chem. Soc., 119, 15, 1997, 3507-3512, Tetrahedron Lett., 40, 32, 1999, 5817-5822). The target compound was obtained in a high yield. Subsequently, 4-methyl-3-cyclohexenyl methanol was synthesized in high yield by reducing this compound.
<Synthesis of 1,2-Bis- (4-methyl-3-cyclohexylmethyl) -2-propanol>
284 g (2 mol) of 4-methyl-3-cyclohexenylethanol and 305 g (2.2 mol) of potassium carbonate were added to 1 L of acetone containing 92 g (1 mol) of epichlorohydrin, and reacted at 50 ° C. for 8 hours. The precipitated salt was removed by filtration, the reaction solution was concentrated under reduced pressure, and the remaining crude product was distilled under reduced pressure to obtain the desired compound. The yield was 90%.
<Synthesis of Exemplified Compound EP-31>
308 g (1 mol) of 1,2-Bis- (4-methyl-3-cyclomethylyloxy) -2-propanol was placed in a 2 L three-headed flask, and the peracetic acid content was maintained while maintaining the internal temperature at 35-40 ° C. 770 g of a 25 mass% acetone solution (192 g (2.5 mol) of peracetic acid) was added dropwise over 4 hours. After completion of the dropwise addition, the reaction was carried out after 4 hours at the same temperature. The reaction solution was stored at −11 ° C. overnight, and the remaining amount of peracetic acid was examined to confirm that 98% or more of the theoretical amount had reacted.
1H NMR(CDCl3) δ(ppm):0.96(s,6H,CH3-)、1.31(s,6H,CH3-)、1.45~2.50(m,14H,シクロヘキサン環)、3.00(m,2H,エポキシ根元)、3.87(s,4H,-O-CH2-)
〔合成例4〕
例示化合物EP-31:1,3-Bis-(4-methyl-3,4-epoxy-cyclohexylmethyloxy)-2-propanolの合成
〈4-Methyl-3-cyclohexenylmethanolの合成〉
公知のDiels-Alder反応によって、イソプレンとアクロレインを原料に、4-Methyl-3-cyclohexenylaldehydeを合成した。反応は、文献(J.Amer.Chem.Soc.,119,15,1997,3507-3512、TetrahedronLett.,40,32,1999,5817-5822)等に記載された条件に準じた反応条件で行ない、高収率で目的の化合物を得た。次いで、この化合物を還元することで4-Methyl-3-cyclohexenylmethanolを高収率で合成した。
〈1,2-Bis-(4-methyl-3-cyclohexenylmethyloxy)-2-propanolの合成〉
4-Methyl-3-cyclohexenylmethanolの284g(2mol)と、エピクロルヒドリンを92g(1mol)含むアセトン1L溶液に炭酸カリウムを305g(2.2mol)添加し、50℃で8時間反応した。析出した塩をろ過によって除去し、反応液を減圧濃縮した後、残った粗生物の減圧蒸留を行い目的の化合物を得た。収率は90%だった。
〈例示化合物EP-31の合成〉
1,2-Bis-(4-methyl-3-cyclohexenylmethyloxy)-2-propanolの308g(1mol)を2Lの三頭フラスコに入れ、内温を35~40℃に保ったまま、過酢酸含有率が25質量%のアセトン溶液770g(過酢酸192g(2.5mol))を4時間かけて滴下した。滴下終了後、そのままの温度で4時間後反応した。反応液は-11℃で一晩保存した後、過酢酸の残量を調べ理論量の98%以上が反応していることを確認した。 The structure of Exemplified Compound EP-17 was confirmed by NMR and MASS analysis.
1H NMR (CDCl 3 ) δ (ppm): 0.96 (s, 6H, CH 3 —), 1.31 (s, 6H, CH 3 —), 1.45 to 2.50 (m, 14H, cyclohexane) Ring), 3.00 (m, 2H, epoxy root), 3.87 (s, 4H, —O—CH 2 —)
[Synthesis Example 4]
Synthesis of Exemplary Compound EP-31: 1,3-Bis- (4-methyl-3,4-epoxy-cyclohexylmethyl) -2-propanol <Synthesis of 4-Methyl-3-cyclohexenylmethyl>
4-Methyl-3-cyclohexenyldehydride was synthesized from isoprene and acrolein by known Diels-Alder reactions. The reaction is performed under the reaction conditions according to the conditions described in the literature (J. Amer. Chem. Soc., 119, 15, 1997, 3507-3512, Tetrahedron Lett., 40, 32, 1999, 5817-5822). The target compound was obtained in a high yield. Subsequently, 4-methyl-3-cyclohexenyl methanol was synthesized in high yield by reducing this compound.
<Synthesis of 1,2-Bis- (4-methyl-3-cyclohexylmethyl) -2-propanol>
284 g (2 mol) of 4-methyl-3-cyclohexenylethanol and 305 g (2.2 mol) of potassium carbonate were added to 1 L of acetone containing 92 g (1 mol) of epichlorohydrin, and reacted at 50 ° C. for 8 hours. The precipitated salt was removed by filtration, the reaction solution was concentrated under reduced pressure, and the remaining crude product was distilled under reduced pressure to obtain the desired compound. The yield was 90%.
<Synthesis of Exemplified Compound EP-31>
308 g (1 mol) of 1,2-Bis- (4-methyl-3-cyclomethylyloxy) -2-propanol was placed in a 2 L three-headed flask, and the peracetic acid content was maintained while maintaining the internal temperature at 35-40 ° C. 770 g of a 25 mass% acetone solution (192 g (2.5 mol) of peracetic acid) was added dropwise over 4 hours. After completion of the dropwise addition, the reaction was carried out after 4 hours at the same temperature. The reaction solution was stored at −11 ° C. overnight, and the remaining amount of peracetic acid was examined to confirm that 98% or more of the theoretical amount had reacted.
次いで、反応液をトルエン1Lで希釈し、水流アスピレーターによる減圧下で50℃に加熱し溜出物がなくなるまで低沸点成分を溜去し除去した。
Next, the reaction solution was diluted with 1 L of toluene, heated to 50 ° C. under reduced pressure using a water aspirator, and the low-boiling components were distilled off and removed until the distillate disappeared.
残った反応組成物を減圧蒸留し、目的の例示化合物EP-31を得た。収率は83%だった。
The remaining reaction composition was distilled under reduced pressure to obtain the target exemplified compound EP-31. The yield was 83%.
例示化合物EP-31の構造は、NMR、MASS分析で確認した。
The structure of Exemplified Compound EP-31 was confirmed by NMR and MASS analysis.
1H NMR(CDCl3) δ(ppm):1.31(s,6H,CH3-)、1.4~2.0(m,14H,シクロヘキサン環)、2.7(s,1H,-OH)、3.10(m,2H,エポキシ根元)、3.45(d,4H,-CH2-O-)、3.50(m,4H,-CH2-O-)、3.92(m,1H,>CH-)
〔合成例5〕
例示化合物EP-35:Bis-(4-methyl-3,4-epoxy-cyclohexylmethyl)oxalateの合成
〈Bis-(4-methyl-3-cyclohexenylmethyl)succinateの合成〉
4-Methyl-3-cyclohexenylmethanolの284g(2mol)と、コハク酸無水物を100g(1mol)含むトルエン1L溶液とに、トルエンスルホン酸1水和物5gを添加し、生成する水を水分離装置で除去しながら110~120℃で8時間反応した。反応液を重曹水で洗浄した後、減圧濃縮でトルエンを溜去した。残った粗生物の減圧蒸留を行い目的の化合物を得た。収率は90%だった。
〈例示化合物EP-35の合成〉
Bis-(4-methyl-3-cyclohexenylmethyl)succinateの335g(1mol)を2Lの三頭フラスコに入れ、内温を35~40℃に保ったまま、過酢酸含有率が25質量%のアセトン溶液770g(過酢酸192g(2.5mol))を4時間かけて滴下した。滴下終了後、そのままの温度で4時間後反応した。反応液は-11℃で一晩保存した後、過酢酸の残量を調べ理論量の98%以上が反応していることを確認した。 1H NMR (CDCl 3 ) δ (ppm): 1.31 (s, 6H, CH 3 —), 1.4 to 2.0 (m, 14H, cyclohexane ring), 2.7 (s, 1H, —OH ), 3.10 (m, 2H, epoxy base), 3.45 (d, 4H, —CH 2 —O—), 3.50 (m, 4H, —CH 2 —O—), 3.92 ( m, 1H,> CH-)
[Synthesis Example 5]
Exemplary Compound EP-35: Synthesis of Bis- (4-methyl-3,4-epoxy-cyclomethylmethyl) oxalate <Synthesis of Bis- (4-methyl-3-methylmethyl) succinate>
To 284 g (2 mol) of 4-methyl-3-cyclohexenyl methanol and 1 L of toluene containing 100 g (1 mol) of succinic anhydride, 5 g of toluenesulfonic acid monohydrate was added, and the water produced was separated with a water separator. The reaction was carried out at 110 to 120 ° C. for 8 hours while removing. The reaction solution was washed with an aqueous sodium bicarbonate solution, and toluene was distilled off by concentration under reduced pressure. The remaining crude product was distilled under reduced pressure to obtain the target compound. The yield was 90%.
<Synthesis of Exemplified Compound EP-35>
335 g (1 mol) of Bis- (4-methyl-3-cyclohexylmethyl) succinate was placed in a 2 L three-headed flask, and 770 g of an acetone solution having a peracetic acid content of 25% by mass while maintaining the internal temperature at 35 to 40 ° C. (192 g (2.5 mol) of peracetic acid) was added dropwise over 4 hours. After completion of the dropwise addition, the reaction was carried out after 4 hours at the same temperature. The reaction solution was stored at −11 ° C. overnight, and the remaining amount of peracetic acid was examined to confirm that 98% or more of the theoretical amount had reacted.
〔合成例5〕
例示化合物EP-35:Bis-(4-methyl-3,4-epoxy-cyclohexylmethyl)oxalateの合成
〈Bis-(4-methyl-3-cyclohexenylmethyl)succinateの合成〉
4-Methyl-3-cyclohexenylmethanolの284g(2mol)と、コハク酸無水物を100g(1mol)含むトルエン1L溶液とに、トルエンスルホン酸1水和物5gを添加し、生成する水を水分離装置で除去しながら110~120℃で8時間反応した。反応液を重曹水で洗浄した後、減圧濃縮でトルエンを溜去した。残った粗生物の減圧蒸留を行い目的の化合物を得た。収率は90%だった。
〈例示化合物EP-35の合成〉
Bis-(4-methyl-3-cyclohexenylmethyl)succinateの335g(1mol)を2Lの三頭フラスコに入れ、内温を35~40℃に保ったまま、過酢酸含有率が25質量%のアセトン溶液770g(過酢酸192g(2.5mol))を4時間かけて滴下した。滴下終了後、そのままの温度で4時間後反応した。反応液は-11℃で一晩保存した後、過酢酸の残量を調べ理論量の98%以上が反応していることを確認した。 1H NMR (CDCl 3 ) δ (ppm): 1.31 (s, 6H, CH 3 —), 1.4 to 2.0 (m, 14H, cyclohexane ring), 2.7 (s, 1H, —OH ), 3.10 (m, 2H, epoxy base), 3.45 (d, 4H, —CH 2 —O—), 3.50 (m, 4H, —CH 2 —O—), 3.92 ( m, 1H,> CH-)
[Synthesis Example 5]
Exemplary Compound EP-35: Synthesis of Bis- (4-methyl-3,4-epoxy-cyclomethylmethyl) oxalate <Synthesis of Bis- (4-methyl-3-methylmethyl) succinate>
To 284 g (2 mol) of 4-methyl-3-cyclohexenyl methanol and 1 L of toluene containing 100 g (1 mol) of succinic anhydride, 5 g of toluenesulfonic acid monohydrate was added, and the water produced was separated with a water separator. The reaction was carried out at 110 to 120 ° C. for 8 hours while removing. The reaction solution was washed with an aqueous sodium bicarbonate solution, and toluene was distilled off by concentration under reduced pressure. The remaining crude product was distilled under reduced pressure to obtain the target compound. The yield was 90%.
<Synthesis of Exemplified Compound EP-35>
335 g (1 mol) of Bis- (4-methyl-3-cyclohexylmethyl) succinate was placed in a 2 L three-headed flask, and 770 g of an acetone solution having a peracetic acid content of 25% by mass while maintaining the internal temperature at 35 to 40 ° C. (192 g (2.5 mol) of peracetic acid) was added dropwise over 4 hours. After completion of the dropwise addition, the reaction was carried out after 4 hours at the same temperature. The reaction solution was stored at −11 ° C. overnight, and the remaining amount of peracetic acid was examined to confirm that 98% or more of the theoretical amount had reacted.
次いで、反応液をトルエン1Lで希釈し、水流アスピレーターによる減圧下で50℃に加熱し、溜出物がなくなるまで低沸点成分を溜去し除去した。
Next, the reaction solution was diluted with 1 L of toluene, heated to 50 ° C. under reduced pressure using a water aspirator, and low-boiling components were distilled off and removed until the distillate disappeared.
残った反応組成物を減圧蒸留し、例示化合物EP-35を得た。収率は75%だった。
The remaining reaction composition was distilled under reduced pressure to obtain Exemplified Compound EP-35. The yield was 75%.
例示化合物EP-35の構造は、NMR、MASS分析で確認した。
1H NMR(CDCl3) δ(ppm):1.31(s,6H,CH3-)、1.4~2.0(m,14H,シクロヘキサン環)、3.10(m,2H,エポキシ根元)、2.62(s,4H,-CH2-CO-)、4.05(d,4H,-CH2-O-)その他の上記で列挙した本発明に係る各脂環式エポキシド化合物も、上記の方法と同様にして収率良く合成できる。 The structure of Exemplified Compound EP-35 was confirmed by NMR and MASS analysis.
1H NMR (CDCl3) δ (ppm): 1.31 (s, 6H, CH 3- ), 1.4 to 2.0 (m, 14H, cyclohexane ring), 3.10 (m, 2H, epoxy root) 2.62 (s, 4H, —CH 2 —CO—), 4.05 (d, 4H, —CH 2 —O—) and other alicyclic epoxide compounds according to the present invention listed above, Similar to the above method, the compound can be synthesized with good yield.
1H NMR(CDCl3) δ(ppm):1.31(s,6H,CH3-)、1.4~2.0(m,14H,シクロヘキサン環)、3.10(m,2H,エポキシ根元)、2.62(s,4H,-CH2-CO-)、4.05(d,4H,-CH2-O-)その他の上記で列挙した本発明に係る各脂環式エポキシド化合物も、上記の方法と同様にして収率良く合成できる。 The structure of Exemplified Compound EP-35 was confirmed by NMR and MASS analysis.
1H NMR (CDCl3) δ (ppm): 1.31 (s, 6H, CH 3- ), 1.4 to 2.0 (m, 14H, cyclohexane ring), 3.10 (m, 2H, epoxy root) 2.62 (s, 4H, —CH 2 —CO—), 4.05 (d, 4H, —CH 2 —O—) and other alicyclic epoxide compounds according to the present invention listed above, Similar to the above method, the compound can be synthesized with good yield.
前記一般式(A)、一般式(I)~一般式(VI)で表される脂環式エポキシド化合物には、紫外線照射により酸を発生する光酸発生剤が含有(添加)されることが好ましい。
The alicyclic epoxide compounds represented by the general formula (A) and the general formulas (I) to (VI) may contain (add) a photoacid generator that generates an acid upon irradiation with ultraviolet rays. preferable.
当該光酸発生剤としては、例えば、化学増幅型フォトレジストや光カチオン重合に利用される化合物が用いられる(有機エレクトロニクス材料研究会編、「イメージング用有機材料」、ぶんしん出版(1993年)、187~192ページ参照)。本発明に好適な化合物の例を以下に挙げる。
As the photoacid generator, for example, a chemical amplification type photoresist or a compound used for photocationic polymerization is used (Organic Materials Research Group, “Organic Material for Imaging”, Bunshin Publishing (1993), See pages 187-192). Examples of compounds suitable for the present invention are listed below.
第1に、ジアゾニウム、アンモニウム、ヨードニウム、スルホニウム、ホスホニウムなどの芳香族オニウム化合物のB(C6F5)4
-、PF6
-、AsF6
-、SbF6
-、p-CH3C6H4SO3
-塩、CF3SO3
-塩などのスルホン酸塩を挙げることができる。
First, B (C 6 F 5 ) 4 − , PF 6 − , AsF 6 − , SbF 6 − , p-CH 3 C 6 H 4 of aromatic onium compounds such as diazonium, ammonium, iodonium, sulfonium, and phosphonium. SO 3 - salt, CF 3 SO 3 - and sulfonic acid salts such as salts.
対アニオンとしてボレート化合物をもつものおよびPF6
-塩が酸発生能力が高く好ましい。オニウム化合物の具体的な例を以下に示す。
Those having a borate compound as a counter anion and PF 6 - salt acid generation capability higher preferred. Specific examples of the onium compound are shown below.
第2に、スルホン酸を発生するスルホン化物を挙げることができる。具体的な化合物を以下に例示する。
Secondly, sulfonated products that generate sulfonic acid can be mentioned. Specific compounds are exemplified below.
第3に、ハロゲン化水素を発生するハロゲン化物も用いることができる。以下に具体的な化合物を例示する。
Thirdly, a halide that generates hydrogen halide can also be used. Specific compounds are exemplified below.
第4に、鉄アレン錯体を挙げることができる。
Fourthly, iron allene complexes can be mentioned.
本発明で用いられる光酸発生剤としては、アリールスルホニウム塩誘導体(例えば、ユニオン・カーバイド社製のサイラキュアUVI-6990、サイラキュアUVI-6974、旭電化工業社製のアデカオプトマーSP-150、アデカオプトマーSP-152、アデカオプトマーSP-170、アデカオプトマーSP-172)、アリルヨードニウム塩誘導体(例えば、ローディア社製のRP-2074)、アレン-イオン錯体誘導体(例えば、チバガイギー社製のイルガキュア261)、ジアゾニウム塩誘導体、トリアジン系開始剤及びその他のハロゲン化物等の酸発生剤が挙げられる。光酸発生剤は、カチオン重合性を有する化合物100質量部に対して、0.2~20質量部の比率で含有させることが好ましい。光酸発生剤の含有量が0.2質量部未満では、硬化物を得ることが困難であり、20質量部を越えて含有させても、更なる硬化性向上効果はない。これら光酸発生剤は、1種または2種以上を選択して使用することができる。
Examples of the photoacid generator used in the present invention include arylsulfonium salt derivatives (for example, Cyracure UVI-6990, Cyracure UVI-6974, manufactured by Union Carbide, Adekaoptomer SP-150, Adekaopter, manufactured by Asahi Denka Kogyo Co., Ltd. Merp SP-152, Adekaoptomer SP-170, Adekaoptomer SP-172), allyl iodonium salt derivatives (for example, RP-2074 manufactured by Rhodia), allene-ion complex derivatives (for example, Irgacure 261 manufactured by Ciba Geigy) ), Acid generators such as diazonium salt derivatives, triazine initiators and other halides. The photoacid generator is preferably contained in a ratio of 0.2 to 20 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the compound having cationic polymerizability. When the content of the photoacid generator is less than 0.2 parts by mass, it is difficult to obtain a cured product, and even if the content exceeds 20 parts by mass, there is no further effect of improving curability. These photoacid generators can be used alone or in combination of two or more.
本発明で用いられる光酸発生剤として好ましいのはスルホニウム塩、ヨードニウム塩、アンモニウム塩、ホスホニウム塩、等のオニウム塩であり、中でもスルホニウム塩化合物が好ましい。
Preferred as the photoacid generator used in the present invention are onium salts such as sulfonium salts, iodonium salts, ammonium salts, phosphonium salts, etc. Among them, sulfonium salt compounds are preferred.
より好ましいスルホニウム塩化合物の構造として、下記の一般式(I-1)、(I-2)、(I-3)で表されるスルホニウム塩が挙げられる。
More preferable sulfonium salt compounds include sulfonium salts represented by the following general formulas (I-1), (I-2), and (I-3).
上記一般式(I-1)中、R11、R12、R13は置換基を表し、m、n、pは0~2の整数を表す。X11
-は対イオンを表す。
In the general formula (I-1), R 11 , R 12 , and R 13 represent substituents, and m, n, and p represent integers of 0 to 2. X 11 − represents a counter ion.
上記一般式(I-2)中、R14は置換基を表し、qは0~2の整数を表す。R15、R16は置換、無置換のアルキル基、置換、無置換のアルケニル基、置換、無置換のアルキニル基、または置換、無置換のアリール基を表す。X12
-は対イオンを表す。
In the above general formula (I-2), R 14 represents a substituent, and q represents an integer of 0 to 2. R 15 and R 16 each represents a substituted, unsubstituted alkyl group, a substituted, unsubstituted alkenyl group, a substituted, unsubstituted alkynyl group, or a substituted, unsubstituted aryl group. X 12 − represents a counter ion.
上記一般式(I-3)中、R17は置換基を表し、rは0~3の整数を表す。R18は水素原子または置換、無置換のアルキル基を表し、R19、R20は置換、無置換のアルキル基、置換、無置換のアルケニル基、置換、無置換のアルキニル基、または置換、無置換のアリール基を表す。X13
-は対イオンを表す。
In the general formula (I-3), R 17 represents a substituent, and r represents an integer of 0 to 3. R 18 represents a hydrogen atom or a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group, and R 19 and R 20 represent a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group, a substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group, a substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group, or a substituted or unsubstituted group. Represents a substituted aryl group. X 13 - is a counter ion.
更に、一般式(I-1)、(I-2)、(I-3)で表されるスルホニウム塩について説明する。一般式(I-1)で、R11、R12、R13は置換基を表す。置換基の例としては、ハロゲン原子(例えば、塩素原子、臭素原子、フッ素原子等)、炭素数1~6個のアルキル基(例えば、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、イソプロピル基、ブチル基等)、炭素数3~6個のシクロアルキル基(例えば、シクロプロピル基、シクロブチル基、シクロペンチル基、シクロヘキシル基等)、炭素数1~6個のアルケニル基(例えば、ビニル基、1-プロペニル基、2-プロペニル基、2-ブテニル基等)、炭素数1~6個のアルキニル基(例えば、アセチレニル基、1-プロピニル基、2-プロピニル基、2-ブチニル基等)、炭素数1~6個のアルコキシ基(例えば、メトキシ基、エトキシ基、n-プロポキシ基、iso-プロポキシ基、n-ブトキシ基、tert-ブトキシ基等)、炭素数1~6個のアルキルチオ基(例えば、メチルチオ基、エチルチオ基、n-プロピルチオ基、iso-プロピルチオ基、n-ブチルチオ基、tert-ブチルチオ基等)、炭素数6~14のアリール基(例えば、フェニル基、ナフチル基、アントラセニル基等)、炭素数6~10のアリールオキシ基(例えば、フェノキシ基、ナフトキシ基等)、炭素数6~10のアリールチオ基(例えば、フェニルチオ基、ナフチルチオ基等)、アシル基(例えば、アセチル基、プロピオニル基、トリフルオロアセチル基、ベンゾイル基等)、アシルオキシ基(例えば、アセトキシ基、プロピオニルオキシ基、トリフルオロアセトキシ基、ベンゾイルオキシ基等)、アルコキシカルボニル基(例えば、メトキシカルボニル基、エトキシカルボニル基、tert-ブトキシカルボニル基等)、炭素数4~8のヘテロ原子含有芳香族環基(例えば、フリル基、チエニル基等)、ニトロ基、シアノ基等が挙げられる。
Further, the sulfonium salts represented by the general formulas (I-1), (I-2), and (I-3) will be described. In the general formula (I-1), R 11 , R 12 and R 13 each represent a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom (eg, chlorine atom, bromine atom, fluorine atom), an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms (eg, methyl group, ethyl group, propyl group, isopropyl group, butyl group, etc.) ), A cycloalkyl group having 3 to 6 carbon atoms (for example, cyclopropyl group, cyclobutyl group, cyclopentyl group, cyclohexyl group, etc.), an alkenyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms (for example, vinyl group, 1-propenyl group, 2-propenyl group, 2-butenyl group, etc.), alkynyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms (for example, acetylenyl group, 1-propynyl group, 2-propynyl group, 2-butynyl group, etc.), 1 to 6 carbon atoms Alkoxy groups (for example, methoxy group, ethoxy group, n-propoxy group, iso-propoxy group, n-butoxy group, tert-butoxy group, etc.), having 1 to 6 carbon atoms Alkylthio group (eg, methylthio group, ethylthio group, n-propylthio group, iso-propylthio group, n-butylthio group, tert-butylthio group, etc.), aryl group having 6 to 14 carbon atoms (eg, phenyl group, naphthyl group, Anthracenyl group, etc.), aryloxy groups having 6 to 10 carbon atoms (eg, phenoxy group, naphthoxy group, etc.), arylthio groups having 6 to 10 carbon atoms (eg, phenylthio group, naphthylthio group, etc.), acyl groups (eg, acetyl) Group, propionyl group, trifluoroacetyl group, benzoyl group, etc.), acyloxy group (eg, acetoxy group, propionyloxy group, trifluoroacetoxy group, benzoyloxy group, etc.), alkoxycarbonyl group (eg, methoxycarbonyl group, ethoxycarbonyl) Group, tert-butoxy Carbonyl group and the like), hetero atom-containing aromatic Hajime Tamaki having 4 to 8 carbon atoms (e.g., furyl group, a thienyl group, etc.), a nitro group, a cyano group, and the like.
置換基として好ましくは、ハロゲン原子、アルキル基、アルキルオキシ基、アリール基、アリールオキシ基、アリールチオ基、アシル基である。これらの置換基のうち可能なものは更に置換されていてもよい。m、n、pは0~2の整数を表わしそれぞれが1以上であることが好ましい。X11
-は対アニオンを表す。対アニオンとしては、BF4
-、B(C6F5)4
-、PF6
-、AsF6
-、SbF6
-などの錯イオン、p-CH3C6H4SO3
-、CF3SO3
-などのスルホネートイオンを挙げることができる。対アニオンとしてはボレートイオンおよびPF6
-が酸発生能力が高く好ましい。
Preferred examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkyloxy group, an aryl group, an aryloxy group, an arylthio group, and an acyl group. Of these substituents, possible ones may be further substituted. m, n and p each represents an integer of 0 to 2, and each is preferably 1 or more. X 11 - is a counter anion. Counter anions include complex ions such as BF 4 − , B (C 6 F 5 ) 4 − , PF 6 − , AsF 6 − , SbF 6 — , p-CH 3 C 6 H 4 SO 3 − , CF 3 SO 3 - can be given sulfonate ion such. As the counter anion, borate ion and PF 6 - are preferable because of their high acid generation ability.
一般式(I-2)で、R14は置換基を表す。置換基の例としては、ハロゲン原子(例えば、塩素原子、臭素原子、フッ素原子等)炭素数1~6個のアルキル基(例えば、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、イソプロピル基、ブチル基等)、炭素数3~6個のシクロアルキル基(例えば、シクロプロピル基、シクロブチル基、シクロペンチル基、シクロヘキシル基等)、炭素数1~6個のアルケニル基(例えば、ビニル基、1-プロペニル基、2-プロペニル基、2-ブテニル基等)、炭素数1~6個のアルキニル基(例えば、アセチレニル基、1-プロピニル基、2-プロピニル基、2-ブチニル基等)、炭素数1~6個のアルコキシ基(例えば、メトキシ基、エトキシ基、n-プロポキシ基、iso-プロポキシ基、n-ブトキシ基、tert-ブトキシ基等)、炭素数1~6個のアルキルチオ基(例えば、メチルチオ基、エチルチオ基、n-プロピルチオ基、iso-プロピルチオ基、n-ブチルチオ基、tert-ブチルチオ基等)、炭素数6~14のアリール基(例えば、フェニル基、ナフチル基、アントラセニル基等)、炭素数6~10のアリールオキシ基(例えば、フェノキシ基、ナフトキシ基等)、炭素数6~10のアリールチオ基(例えば、フェニルチオ基、ナフチルチオ基等)、アシル基(例えば、アセチル基、プロピオニル基、トリフルオロアセチル基、ベンゾイル基等)、アシルオキシ基(例えば、アセトキシ基、プロピオニルオキシ基、トリフルオロアセトキシ基、ベンゾイルオキシ基等)、アルコキシカルボニル基(例えば、メトキシカルボニル基、エトキシカルボニル基、tert-ブトキシカルボニル基等)、炭素数4~8のヘテロ原子含有芳香族環基(例えば、フリル基、チエニル基等)、ニトロ基、シアノ基、等が挙げられる。好ましくは、ハロゲン原子、アルキル基、アリール基、アルコキシ基、アリールオキシ基である。これらの置換基のうち可能なものは更に置換されていてもよい。qは0~2の整数を表わし1以上であることが好ましく、より好ましくは2である。
In the general formula (I-2), R 14 represents a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom (for example, chlorine atom, bromine atom, fluorine atom, etc.) and an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms (for example, methyl group, ethyl group, propyl group, isopropyl group, butyl group, etc.) A cycloalkyl group having 3 to 6 carbon atoms (for example, a cyclopropyl group, a cyclobutyl group, a cyclopentyl group, a cyclohexyl group, etc.), an alkenyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms (for example, a vinyl group, a 1-propenyl group, 2 -Propenyl group, 2-butenyl group, etc.), alkynyl groups having 1 to 6 carbon atoms (for example, acetylenyl group, 1-propynyl group, 2-propynyl group, 2-butynyl group, etc.), 1 to 6 carbon atoms An alkoxy group (for example, a methoxy group, an ethoxy group, an n-propoxy group, an iso-propoxy group, an n-butoxy group, a tert-butoxy group), an aryl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms Kirthio group (for example, methylthio group, ethylthio group, n-propylthio group, iso-propylthio group, n-butylthio group, tert-butylthio group, etc.), aryl group having 6 to 14 carbon atoms (for example, phenyl group, naphthyl group, Anthracenyl group, etc.), aryloxy groups having 6 to 10 carbon atoms (eg, phenoxy group, naphthoxy group, etc.), arylthio groups having 6 to 10 carbon atoms (eg, phenylthio group, naphthylthio group, etc.), acyl groups (eg, acetyl) Group, propionyl group, trifluoroacetyl group, benzoyl group, etc.), acyloxy group (eg, acetoxy group, propionyloxy group, trifluoroacetoxy group, benzoyloxy group, etc.), alkoxycarbonyl group (eg, methoxycarbonyl group, ethoxycarbonyl) Group, tert-butoxyca Boniru group), hetero atom-containing aromatic Hajime Tamaki having 4 to 8 carbon atoms (e.g., furyl group, a thienyl group, etc.), a nitro group, a cyano group, and the like. Preferably, they are a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, an alkoxy group, and an aryloxy group. Of these substituents, possible ones may be further substituted. q represents an integer of 0 to 2, preferably 1 or more, and more preferably 2.
またR15、R16は置換、無置換のアルキル基、置換、無置換のアルケニル基、置換、無置換のアルキニル基、または置換、無置換のアリール基を表す。置換基の例としては、ハロゲン原子(例えば、塩素原子、臭素原子、フッ素原子等)、炭素数1~6個のアルキル基(例えば、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、イソプロピル基、ブチル基等)、炭素数3~6個のシクロアルキル基(例えば、シクロプロピル基、シクロブチル基、シクロペンチル基、シクロヘキシル基等)、炭素数1~6個のアルケニル基(例えば、ビニル基、1-プロペニル基、2-プロペニル基、2-ブテニル基等)、炭素数1~6個のアルキニル基(例えば、アセチレニル基、1-プロピニル基、2-プロピニル基、2-ブチニル基等)、炭素数1~6個のアルコキシ基(例えば、メトキシ基、エトキシ基、n-プロポキシ基、iso-プロポキシ基、n-ブトキシ基、tert-ブトキシ基等)、炭素数1~6個のアルキルチオ基(例えば、メチルチオ基、エチルチオ基、n-プロピルチオ基、iso-プロピルチオ基、n-ブチルチオ基、tert-ブチルチオ基等)、炭素数6~14のアリール基(例えば、フェニル基、ナフチル基、アントラセニル基等)、炭素数6~10のアリールオキシ基(例えば、フェノキシ基、ナフトキシ基等)、炭素数6~10のアリールチオ基(例えば、フェニルチオ基、ナフチルチオ基等)、アシル基(例えば、アセチル基、プロピオニル基、トリフルオロアセチル基、ベンゾイル基等)、アシルオキシ基(例えば、アセトキシ基、プロピオニルオキシ基、トリフルオロアセトキシ基、ベンゾイルオキシ基等)、アルコキシカルボニル基(例えば、メトキシカルボニル基、エトキシカルボニル基、tert-ブトキシカルボニル基等)、炭素数4~8のヘテロ原子含有芳香族環基(例えば、フリル基、チエニル基等)、ニトロ基、シアノ基、水酸基等が挙げられる。好ましくは、ハロゲン原子、アルキル基、アルコキシ基、アリールオキシ基、アシル基である。
R 15 and R 16 represent a substituted, unsubstituted alkyl group, a substituted, unsubstituted alkenyl group, a substituted, unsubstituted alkynyl group, or a substituted, unsubstituted aryl group. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom (eg, chlorine atom, bromine atom, fluorine atom), an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms (eg, methyl group, ethyl group, propyl group, isopropyl group, butyl group, etc.) ), A cycloalkyl group having 3 to 6 carbon atoms (for example, cyclopropyl group, cyclobutyl group, cyclopentyl group, cyclohexyl group, etc.), an alkenyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms (for example, vinyl group, 1-propenyl group, 2-propenyl group, 2-butenyl group, etc.), alkynyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms (for example, acetylenyl group, 1-propynyl group, 2-propynyl group, 2-butynyl group, etc.), 1 to 6 carbon atoms Alkoxy groups (for example, methoxy group, ethoxy group, n-propoxy group, iso-propoxy group, n-butoxy group, tert-butoxy group, etc.), having 1 to 6 carbon atoms Alkylthio group (eg, methylthio group, ethylthio group, n-propylthio group, iso-propylthio group, n-butylthio group, tert-butylthio group, etc.), aryl group having 6 to 14 carbon atoms (eg, phenyl group, naphthyl group, Anthracenyl group, etc.), aryloxy groups having 6 to 10 carbon atoms (eg, phenoxy group, naphthoxy group, etc.), arylthio groups having 6 to 10 carbon atoms (eg, phenylthio group, naphthylthio group, etc.), acyl groups (eg, acetyl) Group, propionyl group, trifluoroacetyl group, benzoyl group, etc.), acyloxy group (eg, acetoxy group, propionyloxy group, trifluoroacetoxy group, benzoyloxy group, etc.), alkoxycarbonyl group (eg, methoxycarbonyl group, ethoxycarbonyl) Group, tert-butoxy Carbonyl group and the like), hetero atom-containing aromatic Hajime Tamaki having 4 to 8 carbon atoms (e.g., furyl group, a thienyl group, etc.), a nitro group, a cyano group, and a hydroxyl group. Preferred are a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, and an acyl group.
R15、R16として好ましくは、置換、無置換のアルキル基、または置換、無置換のアリール基であり、置換基として好ましくは、ハロゲン原子、アルキル基、アルコキシ基、アリール基、アリールオキシ基、アシル基、水酸基である。
R 15 and R 16 are preferably a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group or a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group, and the substituent is preferably a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an aryl group, an aryloxy group, An acyl group and a hydroxyl group.
X12
-は対アニオンを表す。対アニオンとしては、BF4
-、B(C6F5)4
-、PF6
-、AsF6
-、SbF6
-などの錯イオン、p-CH3C6H4SO3
-、CF3SO3
-などのスルホネートイオンを挙げることができる。対アニオンとしてはボレートイオンおよびPF6
-が酸発生能力が高く好ましい。
X 12 - is a counter anion. Counter anions include complex ions such as BF 4 − , B (C 6 F 5 ) 4 − , PF 6 − , AsF 6 − , SbF 6 — , p-CH 3 C 6 H 4 SO 3 − , CF 3 SO 3 - can be given sulfonate ion such. As the counter anion, borate ion and PF 6 - are preferable because of their high acid generation ability.
一般式(I-3)で、R17は置換基を表す。置換基の例としては、ハロゲン原子(例えば、塩素原子、臭素原子、フッ素原子等)、炭素数1~6個のアルキル基(例えば、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、イソプロピル基、ブチル基等)、炭素数3~6個のシクロアルキル基(例えば、シクロプロピル基、シクロブチル基、シクロペンチル基、シクロヘキシル基等)、炭素数1~6個のアルケニル基(例えば、ビニル基、1-プロペニル基、2-プロペニル基、2-ブテニル基等)、炭素数1~6個のアルキニル基(例えば、アセチレニル基、1-プロピニル基、2-プロピニル基、2-ブチニル基等)、炭素数1~6個のアルコキシ基(例えば、メトキシ基、エトキシ基、n-プロポキシ基、iso-プロポキシ基、n-ブトキシ基、tert-ブトキシ基等)、炭素数6~14のアリール基(例えば、フェニル基、ナフチル基、アントラセニル基等)、アシル基(例えば、アセチル基、プロピオニル基、トリフルオロアセチル基、ベンゾイル基等)、アシルオキシ基(例えば、アセトキシ基、プロピオニルオキシ基、トリフルオロアセトキシ基、ベンゾイルオキシ基等)、アルコキシカルボニル基(例えば、メトキシカルボニル基、エトキシカルボニル基、tert-ブトキシカルボニル基等)、炭素数6~10のアリール基(例えば、フェニル基、ナフチル基、アントラセニル基等)、炭素数4~8のヘテロ原子含有芳香族環基(例えば、フリル基、チエニル基等)、ニトロ基、シアノ基、等が挙げられる。好ましくはハロゲン原子、アルキル基、アルコキシ基、アリール基、アリールオキシ基、アシル基である。rは0~3の整数を表わし1以上であることが好ましく、より好ましくは2である。
In the general formula (I-3), R 17 represents a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom (eg, chlorine atom, bromine atom, fluorine atom), an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms (eg, methyl group, ethyl group, propyl group, isopropyl group, butyl group, etc.) ), A cycloalkyl group having 3 to 6 carbon atoms (for example, cyclopropyl group, cyclobutyl group, cyclopentyl group, cyclohexyl group, etc.), an alkenyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms (for example, vinyl group, 1-propenyl group, 2-propenyl group, 2-butenyl group, etc.), alkynyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms (for example, acetylenyl group, 1-propynyl group, 2-propynyl group, 2-butynyl group, etc.), 1 to 6 carbon atoms Alkoxy groups (for example, methoxy group, ethoxy group, n-propoxy group, iso-propoxy group, n-butoxy group, tert-butoxy group, etc.), having 6 to 14 carbon atoms Reel group (for example, phenyl group, naphthyl group, anthracenyl group, etc.), acyl group (for example, acetyl group, propionyl group, trifluoroacetyl group, benzoyl group, etc.), acyloxy group (for example, acetoxy group, propionyloxy group, tri Fluoroacetoxy group, benzoyloxy group, etc.), alkoxycarbonyl group (eg, methoxycarbonyl group, ethoxycarbonyl group, tert-butoxycarbonyl group, etc.), aryl group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms (eg, phenyl group, naphthyl group, anthracenyl group) Group), a hetero atom-containing aromatic ring group having 4 to 8 carbon atoms (for example, furyl group, thienyl group, etc.), nitro group, cyano group, and the like. A halogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an aryl group, an aryloxy group, and an acyl group are preferable. r represents an integer of 0 to 3, preferably 1 or more, more preferably 2.
R18は水素原子または置換、無置換のアルキル基を表し、R19、R20は置換、無置換のアルキル基、置換、無置換のアルケニル基、置換、無置換のアルキニル基、または置換、無置換のアリール基を表す。置換基の例としては、ハロゲン原子(例えば、塩素原子、臭素原子、フッ素原子等)、炭素数1~6個のアルキル基(例えば、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、イソプロピル基、ブチル基等)、炭素数3~6個のシクロアルキル基(例えば、シクロプロピル基、シクロブチル基、シクロペンチル基、シクロヘキシル基等)、炭素数1~6個のアルケニル基(例えば、ビニル基、1-プロペニル基、2-プロペニル基、2-ブテニル基等)、炭素数1~6個のアルキニル基(例えば、アセチレニル基、1-プロピニル基、2-プロピニル基、2-ブチニル基等)、炭素数1~6個のアルコキシ基(例えば、メトキシ基、エトキシ基、n-プロポキシ基、iso-プロポキシ基、n-ブトキシ基、tert-ブトキシ基等)、炭素数6~14のアリール基(例えば、フェニル基、ナフチル基、アントラセニル基等)、アシル基(例えば、アセチル基、プロピオニル基、トリフルオロアセチル基、ベンゾイル基等)、アシルオキシ基(例えば、アセトキシ基、プロピオニルオキシ基、トリフルオロアセトキシ基、ベンゾイルオキシ基等)、アルコキシカルボニル基(例えば、メトキシカルボニル基、エトキシカルボニル基、tert-ブトキシカルボニル基等)、炭素数6~10のアリール基(例えば、フェニル基、ナフチル基、アントラセニル基等)、炭素数4~8のヘテロ原子含有芳香族環基(例えば、フリル基、チエニル基等)、ニトロ基、シアノ基等が挙げられる。好ましくはハロゲン原子、アルキル基、アルコキシ基、アリール基、アリールオキシ基、アシル基である。
R 18 represents a hydrogen atom or a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group, and R 19 and R 20 represent a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group, a substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group, a substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group, or a substituted or unsubstituted group. Represents a substituted aryl group. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom (eg, chlorine atom, bromine atom, fluorine atom), an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms (eg, methyl group, ethyl group, propyl group, isopropyl group, butyl group, etc.) ), A cycloalkyl group having 3 to 6 carbon atoms (for example, cyclopropyl group, cyclobutyl group, cyclopentyl group, cyclohexyl group, etc.), an alkenyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms (for example, vinyl group, 1-propenyl group, 2-propenyl group, 2-butenyl group, etc.), alkynyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms (for example, acetylenyl group, 1-propynyl group, 2-propynyl group, 2-butynyl group, etc.), 1 to 6 carbon atoms Alkoxy groups (for example, methoxy group, ethoxy group, n-propoxy group, iso-propoxy group, n-butoxy group, tert-butoxy group, etc.), having 6 to 14 carbon atoms Reel group (for example, phenyl group, naphthyl group, anthracenyl group, etc.), acyl group (for example, acetyl group, propionyl group, trifluoroacetyl group, benzoyl group, etc.), acyloxy group (for example, acetoxy group, propionyloxy group, tri Fluoroacetoxy group, benzoyloxy group, etc.), alkoxycarbonyl group (eg, methoxycarbonyl group, ethoxycarbonyl group, tert-butoxycarbonyl group, etc.), aryl group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms (eg, phenyl group, naphthyl group, anthracenyl group) Group), a hetero atom-containing aromatic ring group having 4 to 8 carbon atoms (for example, furyl group, thienyl group, etc.), nitro group, cyano group and the like. A halogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an aryl group, an aryloxy group, and an acyl group are preferable.
R18として好ましくは、水素原子または無置換の低級アルキル基(メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基)であり、R19、R20として、好ましくは置換、無置換のアルキル基、または置換、無置換のアリール基であり、置換基として、好ましくはハロゲン原子、アルキル基、アルコキシ基、アリール基、アリールオキシ基、アシル基である。X13
-は対アニオンを表す。対アニオンとしては、BF4
-、B(C6F5)4
-、PF6
-、AsF6
-、SbF6
-などの錯イオン、p-CH3C6H4SO3
-、CF3SO3
-などのスルホネートイオンを挙げることができる。対アニオンとしてはボレートイオンおよびPF6
-が酸発生能力が高く好ましい。
R 18 is preferably a hydrogen atom or an unsubstituted lower alkyl group (methyl group, ethyl group, propyl group), and R 19 and R 20 are preferably a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group, or a substituted or unsubstituted group. The substituent is preferably a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an aryl group, an aryloxy group, or an acyl group. X 13 - is a counter anion. Counter anions include complex ions such as BF 4 − , B (C 6 F 5 ) 4 − , PF 6 − , AsF 6 − , SbF 6 — , p-CH 3 C 6 H 4 SO 3 − , CF 3 SO 3 - can be given sulfonate ion such. As the counter anion, borate ion and PF 6 - are preferable because of their high acid generation ability.
以下に、一般式(I-1)、(I-2)、(I-3)で表されるスルホニウム塩の具体例を示すが、本発明はこれらに限定されるものではない。
Specific examples of the sulfonium salts represented by the general formulas (I-1), (I-2), and (I-3) are shown below, but the present invention is not limited thereto.
光重合促進剤としては、アントラセン、アントラセン誘導体(例えば、旭電化工業社製のアデカオプトマーSP-100)、フェノチアジン(10H-フェノチアジン)、フェノチアジン誘導体(例えば、10-メチルフェノチアジン、10-エチルフェノチアジン、10-デシルフェノチアジン、10-アセチルフェノチアジン10-デシルフェノチアジン-5-オキシド、10-デシルフェノチアジン-5,5-ジオキシド、10-アセチルフェノチアジン-5,5-ジオキシド)が挙げられる。これらの光重合促進剤は1種または複数を組み合わせて使用することができる。
Examples of the photopolymerization accelerator include anthracene, anthracene derivatives (for example, Adekaoptomer SP-100 manufactured by Asahi Denka Kogyo Co., Ltd.), phenothiazine (10H-phenothiazine), phenothiazine derivatives (for example, 10-methylphenothiazine, 10-ethylphenothiazine, 10-decylphenothiazine, 10-acetylphenothiazine, 10-decylphenothiazine-5-oxide, 10-decylphenothiazine-5,5-dioxide, 10-acetylphenothiazine-5,5-dioxide). These photopolymerization accelerators can be used alone or in combination.
前記一般式(A)、一般式(I)~一般式(VI)で表される脂環式エポキシド化合物には、オキセタン化合物が含有(添加)されることが好ましい。
The alicyclic epoxide compound represented by the general formula (A), general formula (I) to general formula (VI) preferably contains (adds) an oxetane compound.
当該オキセタン化合物としては、従来公知のオキセタン化合物を用いることができるが、特に2位が置換されていないオキセタン化合物を併用することで、感度向上効果あるいは硬化膜物性の改良効果を得ることができ好ましい。
As the oxetane compound, a conventionally known oxetane compound can be used, and in particular, when an oxetane compound not substituted at the 2-position is used in combination, a sensitivity improving effect or a cured film property improving effect can be obtained. .
以下、2位が置換されていないオキセタン化合物について説明する。
Hereinafter, the oxetane compound in which the 2-position is not substituted will be described.
2位が置換されていないオキセタン化合物の一例としては、下記一般式(101)で示される化合物が挙げられる。
An example of an oxetane compound in which the 2-position is not substituted is a compound represented by the following general formula (101).
一般式(101)において、R1は水素原子やメチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、ブチル基等の炭素数1~6のアルキル基、炭素数1~6のフルオロアルキル基、アリル基、アリール基、フリル基またはチエニル基である。R2はメチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、ブチル基等の炭素数1~6個のアルキル基、1-プロペニル基、2-プロペニル基、2-メチル-1-プロペニル基、2-メチル-2-プロペニル基、1-ブテニル基、2-ブテニル基、3-ブテニル基等の炭素数2~6個のアルケニル基、フェニル基、ベンジル基、フルオロベンジル基、メトキシベンジル基、フェノキシエチル基等の芳香環を有する基、エチルカルボニル基、プロピルカルボニル基、ブチルカルボニル基等の炭素数2~6個のアルキルカルボニル基、エトキシカルボニル基、プロポキシカルボニル基、ブトキシカルボニル基等の炭素数2~6個のアルコキシカルボニル基、またはエチルカルバモイル基、プロピルカルバモイル基、ブチルカルバモイル基、ペンチルカルバモイル基等の炭素数2~6個のN-アルキルカルバモイル基等である。本発明で使用するオキセタン化合物としては、1個のオキセタン環を有する化合物を使用することが、得られる組成物が粘着性に優れ、低粘度で作業性に優れるため、特に好ましい。
In the general formula (101), R 1 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms such as a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, or a butyl group, a fluoroalkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, an allyl group, or an aryl group. , Furyl group or thienyl group. R 2 represents an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms such as a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, or a butyl group, a 1-propenyl group, a 2-propenyl group, a 2-methyl-1-propenyl group, or 2-methyl-2. -Alkenyl groups having 2 to 6 carbon atoms such as propenyl group, 1-butenyl group, 2-butenyl group and 3-butenyl group, fragrances such as phenyl group, benzyl group, fluorobenzyl group, methoxybenzyl group and phenoxyethyl group A group having a ring, an alkylcarbonyl group having 2 to 6 carbon atoms such as an ethylcarbonyl group, a propylcarbonyl group and a butylcarbonyl group, an alkoxy having 2 to 6 carbon atoms such as an ethoxycarbonyl group, a propoxycarbonyl group and a butoxycarbonyl group Carbonyl group, ethylcarbamoyl group, propylcarbamoyl group, butylcarbamoyl group, pentylcarbamoyl group An N-alkylcarbamoyl group having 2 to 6 carbon atoms, and the like. As the oxetane compound used in the present invention, it is particularly preferable to use a compound having one oxetane ring because the resulting composition has excellent tackiness, low viscosity and excellent workability.
2個のオキセタン環を有する化合物の一例としては、下記一般式(102)で示される化合物等が挙げられる。
Examples of the compound having two oxetane rings include a compound represented by the following general formula (102).
一般式(102)において、R1は上記一般式(101)におけるそれと同様の基である。R3は、例えば、エチレン基、プロピレン基、ブチレン基等の線状または分枝状アルキレン基、ポリ(エチレンオキシ)基、ポリ(プロピレンオキシ)基等の線状または分枝状ポリ(アルキレンオキシ)基、プロペニレン基、メチルプロペニレン基、ブテニレン基等の線状または分枝状不飽和炭化水素基、またはカルボニル基またはカルボニル基を含むアルキレン基、カルボキシル基を含むアルキレン基、カルバモイル基を含むアルキレン基等である。
In General Formula (102), R 1 is the same group as that in General Formula (101). R 3 is, for example, a linear or branched poly (alkyleneoxy) group such as a linear or branched alkylene group such as an ethylene group, a propylene group or a butylene group, a poly (ethyleneoxy) group or a poly (propyleneoxy) group. ) Group, propenylene group, methylpropenylene group, butenylene group or other linear or branched unsaturated hydrocarbon group, alkylene group containing carbonyl group or carbonyl group, alkylene group containing carboxyl group, alkylene containing carbamoyl group Group.
また、R3としては、下記一般式(103)、(104)及び(105)で示される基から選択される多価基も挙げることができる。
As the R 3, the following general formula (103) can also include polyvalent group selected from groups represented by (104) and (105).
一般式(103)において、R4は水素原子やメチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、ブチル基等の炭素数1~4個のアルキル基、メトキシ基、エトキシ基、プロポキシ基、ブトキシ基等の炭素数1~4個のアルコキシ基、塩素原子、臭素原子等のハロゲン原子、ニトロ基、シアノ基、メルカプト基、低級アルキルカルボキシル基、カルボキシル基、またはカルバモイル基である。
In the general formula (103), R 4 is a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms such as a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, or a butyl group, or a carbon such as a methoxy group, an ethoxy group, a propoxy group, or a butoxy group. A C 1-4 alkoxy group, a halogen atom such as a chlorine atom or a bromine atom, a nitro group, a cyano group, a mercapto group, a lower alkyl carboxyl group, a carboxyl group, or a carbamoyl group.
一般式(104)において、R5は酸素原子、硫黄原子、メチレン基、NH、SO、SO2、C(CF3)2、またはC(CH3)2を表す。
In General Formula (104), R 5 represents an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, a methylene group, NH, SO, SO 2 , C (CF 3 ) 2 , or C (CH 3 ) 2 .
一般式(105)において、R6はメチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、ブチル基等の炭素数1~4個のアルキル基、またはアリール基である。nは0~2000の整数である。R7はメチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、ブチル基の炭素数1~4個のアルキル基、またはアリール基である。R7としては、更に下記一般式(106)で示される基から選択される基も挙げることができる。
In General Formula (105), R 6 is an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms such as a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, or a butyl group, or an aryl group. n is an integer of 0 to 2000. R 7 is a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, a butyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, or an aryl group. R 7 can also include a group selected from the group represented by the following general formula (106).
一般式(106)において、R8はメチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、ブチル基等の炭素数1~4個のアルキル基、またはアリール基である。mは0~100の整数である。
In General Formula (106), R 8 is an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms such as a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, or a butyl group, or an aryl group. m is an integer from 0 to 100.
2個のオキセタン環を有する化合物の具体例としては、下記化合物が挙げられる。
Specific examples of the compound having two oxetane rings include the following compounds.
例示化合物11は、前記一般式(102)において、R1がエチル基、R3がカルボキシル基である化合物である。また、例示化合物12は、前記一般式(102)において、R1がエチル基、R3が前記一般式(105)でR6及びR7がメチル基、nが1である化合物である。
The exemplified compound 11 is a compound in which R 1 is an ethyl group and R 3 is a carboxyl group in the general formula (102). The exemplified compound 12 is a compound in which, in the general formula (102), R 1 is an ethyl group, R 3 is the general formula (105), R 6 and R 7 are methyl groups, and n is 1.
2個のオキセタン環を有する化合物において、上記の化合物以外の好ましい例としては、下記一般式(107)で示される化合物がある。
Among the compounds having two oxetane rings, a preferred example other than the above compound is a compound represented by the following general formula (107).
一般式(107)において、R1は前記一般式(101)のR1と同義である。また、3~4個のオキセタン環を有する化合物の一例としては、下記一般式(108)で示される化合物が挙げられる。
In formula (107), R 1 has the same meaning as R 1 in the general formula (101). An example of a compound having 3 to 4 oxetane rings is a compound represented by the following general formula (108).
一般式(108)において、R1は前記一般式(101)におけるR1と同義である。R9としては、例えば、下記A~Cで示される基等の炭素数1~12の分枝状アルキレン基、下記Dで示される基等の分枝状ポリ(アルキレンオキシ)基または下記Eで示される基等の分枝状ポリシロキシ基等が挙げられる。jは3または4である。
In formula (108), R 1 has the same meaning as R 1 in the general formula (101). As R 9 , for example, a branched alkylene group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms such as groups represented by the following A to C, a branched poly (alkyleneoxy) group such as a group represented by the following D, or the following E And branched polysiloxy groups such as those shown. j is 3 or 4.
上記Aにおいて、R10はメチル基、エチル基またはプロピル基等の低級アルキル基である。また、上記Dにおいて、pは1~10の整数である。
In A above, R 10 is a lower alkyl group such as a methyl group, an ethyl group or a propyl group. In D, p is an integer of 1 to 10.
3~4個のオキセタン環を有する化合物の一例としては、例示化合物13が挙げられる。
Example compound 13 is an example of a compound having 3 to 4 oxetane rings.
更に、上記説明した以外の1~4個のオキセタン環を有する化合物の例としては、下記一般式(109)で示される化合物が挙げられる。
Furthermore, examples of compounds having 1 to 4 oxetane rings other than those described above include compounds represented by the following general formula (109).
一般式(109)において、R8は前記一般式(106)のR8と同義である。R11はメチル基、エチル基、プロピル基またはブチル基等の炭素数1~4のアルキル基またはトリアルキルシリル基であり、rは1~4である。
In formula (109), R 8 has the same meaning as R 8 in the general formula (106). R 11 is an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms such as a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group or a butyl group, or a trialkylsilyl group, and r is 1 to 4.
本発明で使用するオキセタン化合物の好ましい具体例としては、以下に示す化合物がある。
Preferred examples of the oxetane compound used in the present invention include the following compounds.
上述したオキセタン環を有する各化合物の製造方法は、特に限定されず、従来知られた方法に従えばよく、例えば、パティソン(D.B.Pattison,J.Am.Chem.Soc.,3455,79(1957))が開示している、ジオールからのオキセタン環合成法等がある。また、これら以外にも、分子量1000~5000程度の高分子量を有する1~4個のオキセタン環を有する化合物も挙げられる。これらの具体的化合物例としては、以下の化合物が挙げられる。
The production method of each compound having an oxetane ring described above is not particularly limited, and may be a conventionally known method, for example, Pattisson (DB Pattison, J. Am. Chem. Soc., 3455, 79). (1957)) discloses a method for synthesizing an oxetane ring from a diol. In addition to these, compounds having 1 to 4 oxetane rings having a high molecular weight of about 1000 to 5000 are also exemplified. Examples of these specific compounds include the following compounds.
以上のような樹脂5Aには、前記一般式(A)、一般式(I)~一般式(VI)で表される脂環式エポキシド化合物、紫外線照射により酸を発生する光酸発生剤、オキセタン化合物の他に、従来公知の各種添加剤が含有されてもよい。
The resin 5A as described above includes an alicyclic epoxide compound represented by the general formula (A), the general formula (I) to the general formula (VI), a photoacid generator that generates an acid by ultraviolet irradiation, and oxetane. In addition to the compound, various conventionally known additives may be contained.
添加剤の一例としては色材があり、当該色材としては、重合性化合物の主成分に溶解または分散できる色材が使用出来るが、耐候性の点から顔料が好ましい。
An example of the additive is a color material. As the color material, a color material that can be dissolved or dispersed in the main component of the polymerizable compound can be used, but a pigment is preferable from the viewpoint of weather resistance.
ウエハレンズ1の製造にあたっては、成形用の型として、図2のマスター成形型(以下、単に「マスター」とする)10,サブマスター成形型(以下、単に「サブマスター」とする)20が使用される。
<マスター>
図2に示す通り、マスター10は直方体状のベース部12に対し複数の凸部14がアレイ状に形成されている。凸部14はウエハレンズ1のレンズ部5に対応する部位であり、略半球形状にベース部12から突出している。 When the wafer lens 1 is manufactured, a master mold (hereinafter simply referred to as “master”) 10 and a sub master mold (hereinafter simply referred to as “submaster”) 20 shown in FIG. 2 are used as molds for molding. Is done.
<Master>
As shown in FIG. 2, themaster 10 has a plurality of convex portions 14 formed in an array with respect to a rectangular parallelepiped base portion 12. The convex portion 14 is a portion corresponding to the lens portion 5 of the wafer lens 1 and protrudes from the base portion 12 in a substantially hemispherical shape.
<マスター>
図2に示す通り、マスター10は直方体状のベース部12に対し複数の凸部14がアレイ状に形成されている。凸部14はウエハレンズ1のレンズ部5に対応する部位であり、略半球形状にベース部12から突出している。 When the wafer lens 1 is manufactured, a master mold (hereinafter simply referred to as “master”) 10 and a sub master mold (hereinafter simply referred to as “submaster”) 20 shown in FIG. 2 are used as molds for molding. Is done.
<Master>
As shown in FIG. 2, the
マスター10の光学面形状(表面形状)は、図2に示す通りに凸部14が形成された凸形状を有していてもよいし、図4に示す通りに複数の凹部16が形成された凹形状を有していてもよい。但し、これらの凸部14、凹部16の表面(成形面)形状は、ガラス基板3上に成形転写するレンズ部5の光学面形状(ガラス基板3とは反対の面の形状)に対応するポジ形状となっている。以下の説明では図2のマスター10を「マスター10A」と、図4のマスター10を「マスター10B」として、区別している。
The optical surface shape (surface shape) of the master 10 may have a convex shape in which convex portions 14 are formed as shown in FIG. 2, or a plurality of concave portions 16 are formed as shown in FIG. You may have a concave shape. However, the surface (molding surface) shape of these convex portions 14 and concave portions 16 is positive corresponding to the optical surface shape (the shape of the surface opposite to the glass substrate 3) of the lens portion 5 molded and transferred onto the glass substrate 3. It has a shape. In the following description, the master 10 in FIG. 2 is distinguished as “master 10A”, and the master 10 in FIG. 4 is distinguished as “master 10B”.
マスター10Aの成形材料としては、金属または金属ガラスを用いることができる。分類としては鉄系の材料とその他合金が挙げられる。鉄系としては、熱間金型、冷間金型、プラスチック金型、高速度工具鋼、一般構造用圧延鋼材、機械構造用炭素鋼、クロム・モリブデン鋼、ステンレス鋼が挙げられる。その内、プラスチック金型としては、プリハードン鋼、焼入れ焼戻し鋼、時効処理鋼がある。プリハードン鋼としては、SC系、SCM系、SUS系が挙げられる。さらに具体的には、SC系はPXZがある。SCM系はHPM2、HPM7、PX5、IMPAXが挙げられる。SUS系は、HPM38、HPM77、S-STAR、G-STAR、STAVAX、RAMAX-S、PSLが挙げられる。また、鉄系の合金としては特開2005-113161や特開2005-206913が挙げられる。非鉄系の合金は主に、銅合金、アルミ合金、亜鉛合金がよく知られている。例としては、特開平10-219373、特開2000-176970に示されている合金が挙げられる。
As the molding material of the master 10A, metal or metal glass can be used. The classification includes ferrous materials and other alloys. Examples of the iron system include hot dies, cold dies, plastic dies, high-speed tool steel, general structural rolled steel, carbon steel for mechanical structure, chromium / molybdenum steel, and stainless steel. Among them, plastic molds include pre-hardened steel, quenched and tempered steel, and aging treated steel. Examples of pre-hardened steel include SC, SCM, and SUS. More specifically, the SC system is PXZ. SCM systems include HPM2, HPM7, PX5, and IMPAX. Examples of the SUS system include HPM38, HPM77, S-STAR, G-STAR, STAVAX, RAMAX-S, and PSL. Examples of the iron-based alloy include JP-A-2005-113161 and JP-A-2005-206913. As the non-ferrous alloys, copper alloys, aluminum alloys and zinc alloys are well known. Examples thereof include alloys disclosed in JP-A-10-219373 and JP-A-2000-176970.
また、マスター10Aの成形材料としてガラスを用いることもできる。マスター10Aにガラスを用いれば、UV光を通すというメリットも得られる。一般的に使用されているガラスであれば特に限定されない。
Also, glass can be used as a molding material for the master 10A. If glass is used for master 10A, the merit of letting UV light pass is also obtained. If it is the glass generally used, it will not specifically limit.
特に、マスター10Aのモールド成形用材料としては、低融点ガラスや、金属ガラスのように低温で容易に流動性が確保できる材料が挙げられる。低融点ガラスを使用すれば、UV硬化性の材料を成形する際にサンプルの金型側からも照射できるようになるため有利である。低融点ガラスとしては、ガラス転移点が600℃程度またはそれ以下のガラスで、ガラス組成がZnO-PbO- B2O3、PbO-SiO2-B2O3、PbO-P2O5-SnF2などが挙げられる。また、400℃以下で溶融するガラスとして、PbF2-SnF2-SnO-P2O5及びその類似構造品が挙げられる。具体的な材料として、S-FPL51、S-FPL53、S-FSL 5、S-BSL 7、S-BSM 2、S-BSM 4、S-BSM 9、S-BSM10、S-BSM14、S-BSM15、S-BSM16、S-BSM18、S-BSM22、S-BSM25、S-BSM28、S-BSM71、S-BSM81、S-NSL 3、S-NSL 5、S-NSL36、S-BAL 2、S-BAL 3、S-BAL11、S-BAL12、S-BAL14、S-BAL35、S-BAL41、S-BAL42、S-BAM 3、S-BAM 4、S-BAM12、S-BAH10、S-BAH11、S-BAH27、S-BAH28、S-BAH32、S-PHM52、S-PHM53、S-TIL 1、S-TIL 2、S-TIL 6、S-TIL25、S-TIL26、S-TIL27、S-TIM 1、S-TIM 2、S-TIM 3、S-TIM 5、S-TIM 8、S-TIM22、S-TIM25、S-TIM27、S-TIM28、S-TIM35、S-TIM39、S-TIH 1、S-TIH 3、S-TIH 4、S-TIH 6、S-TIH10、S-TIH11、S-TIH13、S-TIH14、S-TIH18、S-TIH23、S-TIH53、S-LAL 7、S-LAL 8、S-LAL 9、S-LAL10、S-LAL12、S-LAL13、S-LAL14、S-LAL18、S-LAL54、S-LAL56、S-LAL58、S-LAL59、S-LAL61、S-LAM 2、S-LAM 3、S-LAM 7、S-LAM51、S-LAM52、S-LAM54、S-LAM55、S-LAM58、S-LAM59、S-LAM60、S-LAM61、S-LAM66、S-LAH51、S-LAH52、S-LAH53、S-LAH55、S-LAH58、S-LAH59、S-LAH60、S-LAH63、S-LAH64、S-LAH65、S-LAH66、S-LAH71、S-LAH79、S-YGH51、S-FTM16、S-NBM51、S-NBH 5、S-NBH 8、S-NBH51、S-NBH52、S-NBH53、S-NBH55、S-NPH 1、S-NPH 2、S-NPH53 、P-FK01S、P-FKH2S、P-SK5S、P-SK12S、P-LAK13S、P-LASF03S、P-LASFH11S、P-LASFH12S等が挙げられるが特にこれらに限定される必要はない。
Particularly, as the molding material of the master 10A, there can be mentioned materials that can easily ensure fluidity at a low temperature, such as low melting point glass and metallic glass. Use of the low melting point glass is advantageous because it enables irradiation from the mold side of the sample when molding a UV curable material. Examples of the low melting point glass include glass having a glass transition point of about 600 ° C. or lower and a glass composition of ZnO—PbO— B2O3, PbO—SiO2—B2O3, PbO—P2O5-SnF2, and the like. Examples of the glass that melts at 400 ° C. or less include PbF2-SnF2-SnO—P2O5 and similar structures. Specific materials include S-FPL51, S-FPL53, S-FSL-5, S-BSL-7, S-BSM-2, S-BSM-4, S-BSM-9, S-BSM10, S-BSM14, S-BSM15 , S-BSM16, S-BSM18, S-BSM22, S-BSM25, S-BSM28, S-BSM71, S-BSM81, S-NSL 3, S-NSL 5, S-NSL36, S-BAL 2, S- BAL 3, S-BAL11, S-BAL12, S-BAL14, S-BAL35, S-BAL41, S-BAL42, S-BAM 3, S-BAM 4, S-BAM12, S-BAH10, S-BAH11, S -BAH27, S-BAH28, S-BAH32, S-PHM52, S-PHM53, S-TIL 1, S-TIL 2, S-TIL 6, S-TIL25, S-TIL26, S-TIL27, S-TIM 1 , S-TIM 2, S-TIM 3, S-TIM 5, S-TIM 8, S-TIM22, S-TIM25, S-TIM27, S-TIM28, S-TIM35, S-TIM39, S-TIH 1, S-TIH 3, S-TIH 4, S-TIH 6, S-TIH10, S-TIH11, S-TIH13, S-TIH14, S-TIH18, S-TIH23, S-TIH53, S-LAL 7, S- LAL 8, S-LAL 9, S-LAL10, S-LAL12, S-LAL13, S-LAL14, S-LAL18, S-LAL54, S-LAL56, S-LAL58, S-LAL59, S-LAL61, S-L LAM 2, S-LAM 3, S-LAM 7, S-LAM51, S-LAM52, S-LAM54, S-LAM55, S-LAM58, S-LAM59, S-LAM60, S-LAM61, S-LAM66, S -LAH51, S-LAH52, S-LAH53, S -LAH55, S-LAH58, S-LAH59, S-LAH60, S-LAH63, S-LAH64, S-LAH65, S-LAH66, S-LAH71, S-LAH79, S-YGH51, S-FTM16, S-NBM51 , S-NBH 5, S-NBH 8, S-NBH51, S-NBH52, S-NBH53, S-NBH55, S-NPH 1, S-NPH 2, S-NPH53, P-FK01S, P-FKH2S, P -SK5S, P-SK12S, P-LAK13S, P-LASF03S, P-LASFH11S, P-LASFH12S and the like are mentioned, but it is not necessary to be limited to these.
また、金属ガラスも同様にモールドにより、容易に成形することができる。金属ガラスとしては特開平8-109419、特開平8-333660、特開平10-81944、特開平10-92619、特開2001-140047、特開2001-303218、特表2003-534925のような構造が挙げられているが、特にこれらに限定される必要はない。
Also, metallic glass can be easily formed by molding as well. The metal glass has a structure such as JP-A-8-109419, JP-A-8-333660, JP-A-10-81944, JP-A-10-92619, JP-A-2001-140047, JP-A-2001-303218, and JP-T-2003-534925. Although mentioned, it is not necessary to specifically limit to these.
マスター10Aの光学面は単一の凸部14が形成された面であってもよいし、図2に示す通りにアレイ状に複数の凸部14が形成された面であってもよい。マスター10Aの光学面を創製する方法として、ダイヤモンド切削加工がある。
The optical surface of the master 10A may be a surface on which a single convex portion 14 is formed, or may be a surface on which a plurality of convex portions 14 are formed in an array as shown in FIG. As a method for creating the optical surface of the master 10A, there is diamond cutting.
マスター10Aの光学面が、単一の凸部14が形成された面であれば、ニッケルリンやアルミ合金、快削真鋳などの材料を型材に用いてダイヤモンドの工具で旋削加工することで実現できる。
If the optical surface of the master 10A is a surface on which a single convex portion 14 is formed, it is realized by turning with a diamond tool using a material such as nickel phosphorus, aluminum alloy or free-cutting true casting as a mold material. it can.
マスター10Aの光学面が、アレイ状に複数の凸部14が形成された面であれば、ダイヤモンドで切れ刃が形成されたボールエンドミルを用いて、光学面形状を切削加工する。このとき、工具の切れ刃は完全な円弧ではなく、切れ刃の使う場所によって加工形状に誤差が発生するため、光学面形状のどの部分を切削するときも、使う切れ刃の位置を同一になるように工具の傾きを調整しながら加工することが望ましい。
If the optical surface of the master 10A is a surface on which a plurality of convex portions 14 are formed in an array, the shape of the optical surface is cut using a ball end mill having a cutting edge made of diamond. At this time, the cutting edge of the tool is not a complete arc, and an error occurs in the machining shape depending on the location where the cutting edge is used. Therefore, when cutting any part of the optical surface shape, the position of the cutting edge used is the same. Thus, it is desirable to work while adjusting the tilt of the tool.
このような加工を行うには、加工機に少なくとも並進自由度3、回転自由度2が必要となり、合計5以上の自由度を有する加工機でなければ実現できないため、マスター10Aの光学面を形成する場合には、5以上の自由度を有する加工機を用いる。
<サブマスター>
図2に示す通り、サブマスター20はサブマスター成形部22とサブマスター基板26とで構成されている。サブマスター成形部22には複数の凹部24がアレイ状に形成されている。凹部24の表面(成形面)形状はウエハレンズ1におけるレンズ部5に対応するネガ形状となっており、図2では略半球形状に凹んでいる。
≪サブマスター成形部≫
サブマスター成形部22は、樹脂22A(第2の硬化性樹脂)によって形成されている。樹脂22Aとしては、離型性の良好な樹脂、特に透明樹脂が好ましい。離型剤を塗布しなくても離型できる点で優れる。樹脂としては、光硬化性樹脂、熱硬化性樹脂、熱可塑性樹脂のいずれでも構わない。 In order to perform such processing, the processing machine needs at least 3 translational degrees of freedom and 2 rotational degrees of freedom, and can only be realized by a processing machine having a total of 5 or more degrees of freedom, so the optical surface of themaster 10A is formed. In this case, a processing machine having 5 or more degrees of freedom is used.
<Submaster>
As shown in FIG. 2, thesub master 20 includes a sub master molding portion 22 and a sub master substrate 26. A plurality of concave portions 24 are formed in the sub master molding portion 22 in an array. The surface (molding surface) shape of the recess 24 is a negative shape corresponding to the lens portion 5 in the wafer lens 1, and is recessed in a substantially hemispherical shape in FIG. 2.
≪Submaster molding part≫
The submaster molding part 22 is formed of a resin 22A (second curable resin). As the resin 22A, a resin having good releasability, particularly a transparent resin is preferable. It is excellent in that it can be released without applying a release agent. As the resin, any of a photo-curing resin, a thermosetting resin, and a thermoplastic resin may be used.
<サブマスター>
図2に示す通り、サブマスター20はサブマスター成形部22とサブマスター基板26とで構成されている。サブマスター成形部22には複数の凹部24がアレイ状に形成されている。凹部24の表面(成形面)形状はウエハレンズ1におけるレンズ部5に対応するネガ形状となっており、図2では略半球形状に凹んでいる。
≪サブマスター成形部≫
サブマスター成形部22は、樹脂22A(第2の硬化性樹脂)によって形成されている。樹脂22Aとしては、離型性の良好な樹脂、特に透明樹脂が好ましい。離型剤を塗布しなくても離型できる点で優れる。樹脂としては、光硬化性樹脂、熱硬化性樹脂、熱可塑性樹脂のいずれでも構わない。 In order to perform such processing, the processing machine needs at least 3 translational degrees of freedom and 2 rotational degrees of freedom, and can only be realized by a processing machine having a total of 5 or more degrees of freedom, so the optical surface of the
<Submaster>
As shown in FIG. 2, the
≪Submaster molding part≫
The sub
光硬化性樹脂としては、フッ素系樹脂が挙げられ、熱硬化性樹脂としては、フッ素系樹脂やシリコーン系樹脂が挙げられる。中でも、離型性の良好なもの、つまり硬化させた時の表面エネルギーの低い樹脂が好ましい。熱可塑性樹脂としては、ポリカーボネート、シクロオレフィンポリマーなどの透明で比較的離型性の良いオレフィン系樹脂が挙げられる。なお、フッ素系樹脂、シリコーン系樹脂、オレフィン系樹脂の順に離型性が良好となる。この場合、サブマスター基板26は無くても構わない。このような樹脂を使用することにより、撓ませることができるので離型の際にさらに優位となる。
Examples of the photo-curable resin include a fluorine-based resin, and examples of the thermosetting resin include a fluorine-based resin and a silicone-based resin. Among them, a resin having good releasability, that is, a resin having a low surface energy when cured is preferable. Examples of the thermoplastic resin include transparent and relatively good releasable olefin resins such as polycarbonate and cycloolefin polymer. In addition, the release property is improved in the order of fluorine resin, silicone resin, and olefin resin. In this case, the sub master substrate 26 may be omitted. By using such a resin, it can be bent, so that it becomes more advantageous at the time of mold release.
以下、フッ素系樹脂、シリコーン系樹脂、熱可塑性樹脂について詳細に説明する。
(フッ素系樹脂)
フッ素系樹脂としては、PTFE(ポリテトラフルオロエチレン)、PFA(テトラフルオロエチレン・パーフルオロアルキルビニルエーテル共重合体)、FEP(テトラフルオロエチレン・ヘキサフルオロプロピレン共重合体(4,6フッ素化))、ETFE(テトラフルオロエチレン・エチレン共重合体)、PVDF(ポリビニリデンフルオライド(2フッ化))、PCTFE(ポリクロロトリフルオロエチレン(3フッ化))、ECTFE(クロロトリフルオロエチレン・エチレン共重合体)、PVF(ポリビニルフルオライド)等が挙げられる。 Hereinafter, the fluorine resin, the silicone resin, and the thermoplastic resin will be described in detail.
(Fluorine resin)
As fluororesin, PTFE (polytetrafluoroethylene), PFA (tetrafluoroethylene / perfluoroalkyl vinyl ether copolymer), FEP (tetrafluoroethylene / hexafluoropropylene copolymer (4,6 fluorinated)), ETFE (tetrafluoroethylene / ethylene copolymer), PVDF (polyvinylidene fluoride (difluoride)), PCTFE (polychlorotrifluoroethylene (trifluoride)), ECTFE (chlorotrifluoroethylene / ethylene copolymer) ), PVF (polyvinyl fluoride) and the like.
(フッ素系樹脂)
フッ素系樹脂としては、PTFE(ポリテトラフルオロエチレン)、PFA(テトラフルオロエチレン・パーフルオロアルキルビニルエーテル共重合体)、FEP(テトラフルオロエチレン・ヘキサフルオロプロピレン共重合体(4,6フッ素化))、ETFE(テトラフルオロエチレン・エチレン共重合体)、PVDF(ポリビニリデンフルオライド(2フッ化))、PCTFE(ポリクロロトリフルオロエチレン(3フッ化))、ECTFE(クロロトリフルオロエチレン・エチレン共重合体)、PVF(ポリビニルフルオライド)等が挙げられる。 Hereinafter, the fluorine resin, the silicone resin, and the thermoplastic resin will be described in detail.
(Fluorine resin)
As fluororesin, PTFE (polytetrafluoroethylene), PFA (tetrafluoroethylene / perfluoroalkyl vinyl ether copolymer), FEP (tetrafluoroethylene / hexafluoropropylene copolymer (4,6 fluorinated)), ETFE (tetrafluoroethylene / ethylene copolymer), PVDF (polyvinylidene fluoride (difluoride)), PCTFE (polychlorotrifluoroethylene (trifluoride)), ECTFE (chlorotrifluoroethylene / ethylene copolymer) ), PVF (polyvinyl fluoride) and the like.
フッ素系樹脂の優位点としては、離型性、耐熱性、耐薬品性、絶縁性、低摩擦性などだが、欠点としては、結晶性なので透明性に劣る。融点が高いので、成形時に高温(300℃程度)が必要である。
Fluorine-based resin has advantages such as releasability, heat resistance, chemical resistance, insulation, and low friction, but the disadvantage is that it is inferior in transparency because it is crystalline. Since the melting point is high, a high temperature (about 300 ° C.) is required during molding.
また、成形方法は、射出成形、押出成形、ブロー成形、トランスファー成形などであり、その中でも特に、光透過性に優れ、射出成形や押出成形も可能なFEP、PFA、PVDF等が好ましい。
Also, the molding method is injection molding, extrusion molding, blow molding, transfer molding, etc. Among them, FEP, PFA, PVDF, etc., which are excellent in light transmittance and can be injection molding and extrusion molding, are particularly preferable.
溶融成形可能なグレートとしては、例えば、旭硝子製 Fluon PFA、住友3M社製 Dyneon PFA、Dyneon THV 等が挙げられる。特に、Dyneon THVシリーズは、低融点(120℃程度)なので、比較的低温で成形でき、高透明なので好ましい。
Examples of melt moldable grades include Asahi Glass Fluon PFA, Sumitomo 3M Dyneon PFA, Dyneon THV, and the like. In particular, the Dyneon THV series is preferable because it has a low melting point (about 120 ° C.) and can be molded at a relatively low temperature and is highly transparent.
また、熱硬化性のアモルファスフッ素樹脂として、旭硝子製 サイトップ グレードSも高透過率、良離型性で好ましい。
(シリコーン系樹脂)
シリコーン系樹脂には、1液湿気硬化型のものと、2液付加反応型、2液縮合型のものがある。 As a thermosetting amorphous fluororesin, CYTOP Grade S manufactured by Asahi Glass is preferable because of its high transmittance and good releasability.
(Silicone resin)
Silicone resins include one-part moisture curing type and two-part addition reaction type and two-part condensation type.
(シリコーン系樹脂)
シリコーン系樹脂には、1液湿気硬化型のものと、2液付加反応型、2液縮合型のものがある。 As a thermosetting amorphous fluororesin, CYTOP Grade S manufactured by Asahi Glass is preferable because of its high transmittance and good releasability.
(Silicone resin)
Silicone resins include one-part moisture curing type and two-part addition reaction type and two-part condensation type.
優位点としては、離型性、柔軟性、耐熱性、難燃性、透湿性、低吸水性、透明グレードが多いなどだが、欠点としては、線膨張率が大きいなどがある。
Advantages include releasability, flexibility, heat resistance, flame resistance, moisture permeability, low water absorption, and many transparent grades, but disadvantages include large linear expansion.
特に、PDMS(ポリジメチルシロキサン)構造を含むような、型取り用途のシリコーン樹脂が離型性良好で好ましく、RTVエラストマーの、高透明グレードが望ましい。例えば、モメンティブ・パフォーマンス・マテリアルズ製 TSE3450(2液混合、付加型)、旭化成ワッカーシリコーン製 ELASTOSIL M 4647(2液型RTVシリコーンゴム)、また、信越シリコーン製のKE-1603(2液混合、付加型RTVゴム)、東レダウコーニング製のSH-9555(2液混合、付加型RTVゴム)、SYLGARD 184、シルポット184、WL-5000シリーズ(感光性シリコーンバッファー材料、UVによりパターニング可能)等が好ましい。
In particular, a silicone resin for mold making that contains a PDMS (polydimethylsiloxane) structure is preferable because of good release properties, and a highly transparent grade of RTV elastomer is desirable. For example, TSE3450 manufactured by Momentive Performance Materials (two-component mixed, additive type), ELASTOSIL M 4647 (two-component RTV silicone rubber) manufactured by Asahi Kasei Wacker Silicone, and KE-1603 manufactured by Shin-Etsu Silicone (added two-component mixed, added) Type RTV rubber), SH-9555 manufactured by Toray Dow Corning (two-component mixed, addition type RTV rubber), SYLGARD 184, Sylpot 184, WL-5000 series (photosensitive silicone buffer material, which can be patterned by UV) and the like are preferable.
成形方法は、2液型RTVゴムの場合、室温硬化または加熱硬化である。
(熱可塑性樹脂)
熱可塑性樹脂としては、脂環式炭化水素系樹脂、アクリル樹脂、ポリカーボネート樹脂、ポリエステル樹脂、ポリエーテル樹脂、ポリアミド樹脂及びポリイミド樹脂等の透明樹脂が挙げられるが、これらの中では、特に脂環式炭化水素系樹脂が好ましく用いられる。サブマスター20を熱可塑性樹脂で構成すれば、従来から実施している射出成形技術をそのまま転用することができ、サブマスター20を容易に作製することができる。また熱可塑性樹脂が脂環式炭化水素系樹脂であれば、吸湿性が低いため、サブマスター20の寿命が長くなる。また、シクロオレフィン樹脂等の脂環式炭化水素系樹脂は、耐光性・光透過性に優れるため、活性光線硬化性樹脂を硬化させるために、UV光源等の短波長の光を用いた場合も劣化が少なく、金型として長期間用いることができる。 In the case of a two-component RTV rubber, the molding method is room temperature curing or heat curing.
(Thermoplastic resin)
Examples of the thermoplastic resin include transparent resins such as alicyclic hydrocarbon resins, acrylic resins, polycarbonate resins, polyester resins, polyether resins, polyamide resins, and polyimide resins. A hydrocarbon-based resin is preferably used. If thesubmaster 20 is made of a thermoplastic resin, the injection molding technique that has been conventionally performed can be used as it is, and the submaster 20 can be easily manufactured. If the thermoplastic resin is an alicyclic hydrocarbon-based resin, the hygroscopic property is low, so the life of the submaster 20 is extended. In addition, since cycloaliphatic hydrocarbon resins such as cycloolefin resins are excellent in light resistance and light transmittance, in order to cure actinic ray curable resins, light having a short wavelength such as a UV light source may be used. There is little deterioration and it can be used as a mold for a long time.
(熱可塑性樹脂)
熱可塑性樹脂としては、脂環式炭化水素系樹脂、アクリル樹脂、ポリカーボネート樹脂、ポリエステル樹脂、ポリエーテル樹脂、ポリアミド樹脂及びポリイミド樹脂等の透明樹脂が挙げられるが、これらの中では、特に脂環式炭化水素系樹脂が好ましく用いられる。サブマスター20を熱可塑性樹脂で構成すれば、従来から実施している射出成形技術をそのまま転用することができ、サブマスター20を容易に作製することができる。また熱可塑性樹脂が脂環式炭化水素系樹脂であれば、吸湿性が低いため、サブマスター20の寿命が長くなる。また、シクロオレフィン樹脂等の脂環式炭化水素系樹脂は、耐光性・光透過性に優れるため、活性光線硬化性樹脂を硬化させるために、UV光源等の短波長の光を用いた場合も劣化が少なく、金型として長期間用いることができる。 In the case of a two-component RTV rubber, the molding method is room temperature curing or heat curing.
(Thermoplastic resin)
Examples of the thermoplastic resin include transparent resins such as alicyclic hydrocarbon resins, acrylic resins, polycarbonate resins, polyester resins, polyether resins, polyamide resins, and polyimide resins. A hydrocarbon-based resin is preferably used. If the
脂環式炭化水素系樹脂としては、下記式(1)で表されるものが例示される。
Examples of the alicyclic hydrocarbon-based resin include those represented by the following formula (1).
式(1)中、「x」、「y」は共重合比を示し、0/100≦y/x≦95/5を満たす実数である。「n」は0、1又は2で置換基Qの置換数を示す。「R1」は炭素数2~20の炭化水素基群から選ばれる1種又は2種以上の(2+n)価の基である。「R2」は水素原子であるか、又は炭素及び水素からなり、炭素数1~10の構造群から選ばれる1種若しくは2種以上の1価の基である。「R3」は炭素数2~20の炭化水素基群から選ばれる1種又は2種以上の2価の基である。「Q」はCOOR4(R4は水素原子であるか、又は炭化水素からなり、炭素数1~10の構造群から選ばれる1種又は2種以上の1価の基である。)で表される構造群から選ばれる1種又は2種以上の1価の基である。
In the formula (1), “x” and “y” represent copolymerization ratios and are real numbers satisfying 0/100 ≦ y / x ≦ 95/5. “N” is 0, 1 or 2, and represents the number of substitutions of the substituent Q. “R 1 ” is one or more (2 + n) -valent groups selected from a hydrocarbon group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms. “R 2 ” is a hydrogen atom or a monovalent group of one or more selected from the group consisting of carbon and hydrogen and having 1 to 10 carbon atoms. “R 3 ” is one or two or more divalent groups selected from a hydrocarbon group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms. “Q” is COOR 4 (R 4 is a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon, and is one or more monovalent groups selected from a structural group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms). It is 1 type or 2 or more types of monovalent group chosen from the structural group made.
式(1)において、R1は、好ましくは炭素数2~12の炭化水素基群から選ばれる1種ないし2種以上の2価の基であり、より好ましくは下記式(2)(式(2)中、pは0~2の整数である。);
In the formula (1), R 1 is preferably one or more divalent groups selected from the group of hydrocarbon groups having 2 to 12 carbon atoms, more preferably the following formula (2) (formula ( In 2), p is an integer of 0 to 2.);
で表される2価の基であり、更に好ましくは前記式(2)において、pが0または1である2価の基である。R1の構造は、1種のみ用いても2種以上併用しても構わない。R2の例としては、水素原子、メチル基、エチル基、n-プロピル基、i-プロピル基、n-ブチル基、2-メチルプロピル基等が挙げられるが、好ましくは、水素原子、及び/又はメチル基であり、最も好ましくは水素原子である。R3の例としては、この基を含む構造単位の好ましい例として、n=0の場合、例えば、下記式(a)、式(b)、式(c)(但し、式(a)~(c)中、R1は前述の通り);
And more preferably a divalent group in which p is 0 or 1 in the formula (2). The structure of R 1 may be used alone or in combination of two or more. Examples of R 2 include a hydrogen atom, a methyl group, an ethyl group, an n-propyl group, an i-propyl group, an n-butyl group, and a 2-methylpropyl group, preferably a hydrogen atom and / or Or a methyl group, and most preferably a hydrogen atom. As an example of R 3 , as a preferred example of a structural unit containing this group, when n = 0, for example, the following formula (a), formula (b), formula (c) (provided formulas (a) to ( c) wherein R 1 is as described above;
などが挙げられる。また、nは好ましくは0である。
Etc. N is preferably 0.
本実施形態において共重合のタイプは特に制限されるものではなく、ランダム共重合、ブロック共重合、交互共重合等、公知の共重合のタイプを適用することができるが、好ましくはランダム共重合である。
In this embodiment, the type of copolymerization is not particularly limited, and known copolymerization types such as random copolymerization, block copolymerization, and alternating copolymerization can be applied, but random copolymerization is preferable. is there.
また、本実施形態で用いられる重合体は、本実施形態の成形方法によって得られる製品の物性を損なわない範囲で、必要に応じて他の共重合可能なモノマーから誘導される繰り返し構造単位を有していてもよい。その共重合比は特に限定されることはないが、好ましくは20モル%以下、さらに好ましくは10モル%以下であり、それ以上共重合させた場合には、光学特性を損ない高精度の光学部品が得られない恐れがある。この時の共重合のタイプは特に限定はされないが、ランダム共重合が好ましい。
In addition, the polymer used in the present embodiment has a repeating structural unit derived from another copolymerizable monomer as required, as long as the physical properties of the product obtained by the molding method of the present embodiment are not impaired. You may do it. The copolymerization ratio is not particularly limited, but is preferably 20 mol% or less, more preferably 10 mol% or less. When the copolymerization is further performed, the optical characteristics are impaired and a high-precision optical component is obtained. May not be obtained. The type of copolymerization at this time is not particularly limited, but random copolymerization is preferred.
サブマスター20に適用される好ましい熱可塑性脂環式炭化水素系重合体のもう一つの例としては、脂環式構造を有する繰り返し単位が、下記式(4)で表される脂環式構造を有する繰り返し単位(a)と、下記式(5)及び/又は下記式(6)及び/又は下記式(7)で表される鎖状構造の繰り返し単位(b)とを合計含有量が90質量%以上になるように含有し、さらに繰り返し単位(b)の含有量が1質量%以上10質量%未満である重合体が例示される。
As another example of a preferable thermoplastic alicyclic hydrocarbon polymer applied to the submaster 20, the repeating unit having an alicyclic structure has an alicyclic structure represented by the following formula (4). The total content of the repeating unit (a) and the repeating unit (b) having a chain structure represented by the following formula (5) and / or the following formula (6) and / or the following formula (7) is 90 mass. Examples thereof include a polymer that is contained so as to be at least% and the content of the repeating unit (b) is 1% by mass or more and less than 10% by mass.
式(4)、式(5)、式(6)及び式(7)中、R21~R33は、それぞれ独立に水素原子、鎖状炭化水素基、ハロゲン原子、アルコキシ基、ヒドロキシ基、エーテル基、エステル基、シアノ基、アミノ基、イミド基、シリル基、及び極性基(ハロゲン原子、アルコキシ基、ヒドロキシ基、エステル基、シアノ基、アミド基、イミド基、又はシリル基)で置換された鎖状炭化水素基等を表す。具体的に、ハロゲン原子としては、フッ素原子、塩素原子、臭素原子、及びヨウ素原子を挙げることができ、極性基で置換された鎖状炭化水素基としては、例えば炭素原子1~20、好ましくは1~10、より好ましくは1~6のハロゲン化アルキル基が挙げられる。鎖状炭化水素基としては、例えば炭素原子数1~20、好ましくは1~10、より好ましくは1~6のアルキル基:炭素原子数2~20、好ましくは2~10、より好ましくは2~6のアルケニル基が挙げられる。
In formula (4), formula (5), formula (6) and formula (7), R21 to R33 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, a chain hydrocarbon group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a hydroxy group, an ether group, Chains substituted with ester groups, cyano groups, amino groups, imide groups, silyl groups, and polar groups (halogen atoms, alkoxy groups, hydroxy groups, ester groups, cyano groups, amide groups, imide groups, or silyl groups) Represents a hydrocarbon group or the like. Specific examples of the halogen atom include a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, and an iodine atom. Examples of the chain hydrocarbon group substituted with a polar group include, for example, 1 to 20 carbon atoms, preferably Examples thereof include 1 to 10, more preferably 1 to 6 halogenated alkyl groups. As the chain hydrocarbon group, for example, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms: 2 to 20 carbon atoms, preferably 2 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 6 carbon atoms. 6 alkenyl groups.
式(4)中のXは、脂環式炭化水素基を表し、それを構成する炭素数は、通常4個~20個、好ましくは4個~10個、より好ましくは5個~7個である。脂環式構造を構成する炭素数をこの範囲にすることで複屈折を低減することができる。また、脂環式構造は単環構造に限らず、例えばノルボルナン環などの多環構造のものでもよい。
X in the formula (4) represents an alicyclic hydrocarbon group, and the number of carbon atoms constituting the group is usually 4 to 20, preferably 4 to 10, more preferably 5 to 7. is there. Birefringence can be reduced by setting the number of carbon atoms constituting the alicyclic structure within this range. The alicyclic structure is not limited to a monocyclic structure, and may be a polycyclic structure such as a norbornane ring.
脂環式炭化水素基は、炭素-炭素不飽和結合を有してもよいが、その含有量は、全炭素-炭素結合の10%以下、好ましくは5%以下、より好ましくは3%以下である。脂環式炭化水素基の炭素-炭素不飽和結合をこの範囲とすることで、透明性、耐熱性が向上する。また、脂環式炭化水素基を構成する炭素には、水素原子、炭化水素基、ハロゲン原子、アルコキシ基、ヒドロキシ基、エステル基、シアノ基、アミド基、イミド基、シリル基、及び極性基(ハロゲン原子、アルコキシ基、ヒドロキシ基、エステル基、シアノ基、アミド基、イミド基、又はシリル基)で置換された鎖状炭化水素基等が結合していてもよく、
中でも水素原子又は炭素原子数1~6個の鎖状炭化水素基が耐熱性、低吸水性の点で好ましい。 The alicyclic hydrocarbon group may have a carbon-carbon unsaturated bond, but the content thereof is 10% or less, preferably 5% or less, more preferably 3% or less of the total carbon-carbon bonds. is there. By setting the carbon-carbon unsaturated bond of the alicyclic hydrocarbon group within this range, transparency and heat resistance are improved. The carbon constituting the alicyclic hydrocarbon group includes a hydrogen atom, hydrocarbon group, halogen atom, alkoxy group, hydroxy group, ester group, cyano group, amide group, imide group, silyl group, and polar group ( A chain hydrocarbon group substituted with a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a hydroxy group, an ester group, a cyano group, an amide group, an imide group, or a silyl group) may be bonded,
Among these, a hydrogen atom or a chain hydrocarbon group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms is preferable in terms of heat resistance and low water absorption.
中でも水素原子又は炭素原子数1~6個の鎖状炭化水素基が耐熱性、低吸水性の点で好ましい。 The alicyclic hydrocarbon group may have a carbon-carbon unsaturated bond, but the content thereof is 10% or less, preferably 5% or less, more preferably 3% or less of the total carbon-carbon bonds. is there. By setting the carbon-carbon unsaturated bond of the alicyclic hydrocarbon group within this range, transparency and heat resistance are improved. The carbon constituting the alicyclic hydrocarbon group includes a hydrogen atom, hydrocarbon group, halogen atom, alkoxy group, hydroxy group, ester group, cyano group, amide group, imide group, silyl group, and polar group ( A chain hydrocarbon group substituted with a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a hydroxy group, an ester group, a cyano group, an amide group, an imide group, or a silyl group) may be bonded,
Among these, a hydrogen atom or a chain hydrocarbon group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms is preferable in terms of heat resistance and low water absorption.
また、式(6)は、主鎖中に炭素-炭素不飽和結合を有しており、式(7)は主鎖中に炭素-炭素飽和結合を有しているが、透明性、耐熱性を強く要求される場合、不飽和結合の含有率は、主鎖を構成する全炭素-炭素間結合の、通常10%以下、好ましくは5%以下、より好ましくは3%以下である。
Further, formula (6) has a carbon-carbon unsaturated bond in the main chain, and formula (7) has a carbon-carbon saturated bond in the main chain. Is strongly required, the content of unsaturated bonds is usually 10% or less, preferably 5% or less, more preferably 3% or less, of all carbon-carbon bonds constituting the main chain.
本実施形態においては、脂環式炭化水素系共重合体中の、式(4)で表される脂環式構造を有する繰り返し単位(a)と、式(5)及び/又は式(6)及び/又は一般式(7)で表される鎖状構造の繰り返し単位(b)との合計含有量は、質量基準で、通常90%以上、好ましくは95%以上、より好ましくは97%以上である。合計含有量を上記範囲にすることで、低複屈折性、耐熱性、低吸水性、機械強度が高度にバランスされる。
In the present embodiment, the repeating unit (a) having an alicyclic structure represented by the formula (4) in the alicyclic hydrocarbon copolymer, the formula (5) and / or the formula (6). And / or the total content of the chain-structured repeating unit (b) represented by the general formula (7) is usually 90% or more, preferably 95% or more, more preferably 97% or more, on a mass basis. is there. By setting the total content within the above range, low birefringence, heat resistance, low water absorption, and mechanical strength are highly balanced.
上記脂環式炭化水素系共重合体を製造する製造方法としては、芳香族ビニル系化合物と共重合可能なその他のモノマーとを共重合し、主鎖及び芳香環の炭素-炭素不飽和結合を水素化する方法が挙げられる。
As a production method for producing the alicyclic hydrocarbon copolymer, an aromatic vinyl compound is copolymerized with another monomer that can be copolymerized, and a carbon-carbon unsaturated bond of the main chain and the aromatic ring is formed. The method of hydrogenating is mentioned.
水素化前の共重合体の分子量は、GPCにより測定されるポリスチレン(またはポリイソプレン)換算質量平均分子量(Mw)で、1,000~1,000,000、好ましくは5,000~500,000、より好ましくは10,000~300,000の範囲である。共重合体の質量平均分子量(Mw)が過度に小さいと、それから得られる脂環式炭化水素系共重合体の成形物の強度特性に劣り、逆に過度に大きいと水素化反応性に劣る。
The molecular weight of the copolymer before hydrogenation is 1,000 to 1,000,000, preferably 5,000 to 500,000 in terms of polystyrene (or polyisoprene) equivalent weight average molecular weight (Mw) measured by GPC. More preferably, it is in the range of 10,000 to 300,000. When the mass average molecular weight (Mw) of the copolymer is excessively small, the strength characteristics of the molded product of the alicyclic hydrocarbon copolymer obtained therefrom are inferior, and conversely when it is excessively large, the hydrogenation reactivity is inferior.
上記の方法において使用する芳香族ビニル系化合物の具体例としては、例えば、スチレン、α-メチルスチレン、α-エチルスチレン、α-プロピルスチレン、α-イソプロピルスチレン、α-t-ブチルスチレン、2-メチルスチレン、3-メチルスチレン、4-メチルスチレン、2,4-ジイソプロピルスチレン、2,4-ジメチルスチレン、4-t-ブチルスチレン、5-t-ブチル-2-メチルスチレン、モノクロロスチレン、ジクロロスチレン、モノフルオロスチレン、4-フェニルスチレン等が挙げられ、スチレン、2-メチルスチレン、3-メチルスチレン、4-メチルスチレン等が好ましい。これらの芳香族ビニル系化合物は、それぞれ単独で、あるいは2種以上を組み合わせて用いることができる。
Specific examples of the aromatic vinyl compound used in the above method include, for example, styrene, α-methylstyrene, α-ethylstyrene, α-propylstyrene, α-isopropylstyrene, α-t-butylstyrene, 2- Methylstyrene, 3-methylstyrene, 4-methylstyrene, 2,4-diisopropylstyrene, 2,4-dimethylstyrene, 4-t-butylstyrene, 5-t-butyl-2-methylstyrene, monochlorostyrene, dichlorostyrene Monofluorostyrene, 4-phenylstyrene and the like, and styrene, 2-methylstyrene, 3-methylstyrene, 4-methylstyrene and the like are preferable. These aromatic vinyl compounds can be used alone or in combination of two or more.
共重合可能なその他のモノマーとしては、格別な限定はないが、鎖状ビニル化合物及び鎖状共役ジエン化合物等が用いられ、鎖状共役ジエンを用いた場合、製造過程における操作性に優れ、また得られる脂環式炭化水素系共重合体の強度特性に優れる。
Other monomers that can be copolymerized are not particularly limited, but chain vinyl compounds and chain conjugated diene compounds are used. When chain conjugated dienes are used, the operability in the production process is excellent. The resulting alicyclic hydrocarbon copolymer is excellent in strength properties.
鎖状ビニル化合物の具体例としては、例えば、エチレン、プロピレン、1-ブテン、1-ペンテン、4-メチル-1-ペンテン等の鎖状オレフィンモノマー;1-シアノエチレン(アクリロニトリル)、1-シアノ-1-メチルエチレン(メタアクリロニトリル)、1-シアノ-1-クロロエチレン(α-クロロアクリロニトリル)等のニトリル系モノマー;1-(メトキシカルボニル)-1-メチルエチレン(メタアクリル酸メチルエステル)、1-(エトキシカルボニル)-1-メチルエチレン(メタアクリル酸エチルエステル)、1-(プロポキシカルボニル)-1-メチルエチレン(メタアクリル酸プロピルエステル)、1-(ブトキシカルボニル)-1-メチルエチレン(メタアクリル酸ブチルエステル)、1-メトキシカルボニルエチレン(アクリル酸メチルエステル)、1-エトキシカルボニルエチレン(アクリル酸エチルエステル)、1-プロポキシカルボニルエチレン(アクリル酸プロピルエステル)、1-ブトキシカルボニルエチレン(アクリル酸ブチルエステル)などの(メタ)アクリル酸エステル系モノマー、1-カルボキシエチレン(アクリル酸)、1-カルボキシ-1-メチルエチレン(メタクリル酸)、無水マレイン酸などの不飽和脂肪酸系モノマー等が挙げられ、中でも、鎖状オレフィンモノマーが好ましく、エチレン、プロピレン、1-ブテンが最も好ましい。
Specific examples of the chain vinyl compound include chain olefin monomers such as ethylene, propylene, 1-butene, 1-pentene and 4-methyl-1-pentene; 1-cyanoethylene (acrylonitrile), 1-cyano- Nitrile monomers such as 1-methylethylene (methacrylonitrile) and 1-cyano-1-chloroethylene (α-chloroacrylonitrile); 1- (methoxycarbonyl) -1-methylethylene (methacrylic acid methyl ester), 1- (Ethoxycarbonyl) -1-methylethylene (methacrylic acid ethyl ester), 1- (propoxycarbonyl) -1-methylethylene (methacrylic acid propyl ester), 1- (butoxycarbonyl) -1-methylethylene (methacrylic) Acid butyl ester), 1-methoxycarbo (Meth) acrylic acid such as ruethylene (acrylic acid methyl ester), 1-ethoxycarbonylethylene (acrylic acid ethyl ester), 1-propoxycarbonylethylene (acrylic acid propyl ester), 1-butoxycarbonylethylene (acrylic acid butyl ester) Examples include ester monomers, unsaturated fatty acid monomers such as 1-carboxyethylene (acrylic acid), 1-carboxy-1-methylethylene (methacrylic acid), and maleic anhydride, among which chain olefin monomers are preferred, Most preferred are ethylene, propylene and 1-butene.
鎖状共役ジエンは、例えば、1,3-ブタジエン、イソプレン、2,3-ジメチル-1,3-ブタジエン、1,3-ペンタジエン、及び1,3-ヘキサジエン等が挙げられる。これら鎖状ビニル化合物及び鎖状共役ジエンの中でも鎖状共役ジエンが好ましく、ブタジエン、イソプレンが特に好ましい。これらの鎖状ビニル化合物及び鎖状共役ジエンは、それぞれ単独で、あるいは2種以上を組み合わせて用いることができる。
Examples of the chain conjugated diene include 1,3-butadiene, isoprene, 2,3-dimethyl-1,3-butadiene, 1,3-pentadiene, 1,3-hexadiene, and the like. Of these chain vinyl compounds and chain conjugated dienes, chain conjugated dienes are preferable, and butadiene and isoprene are particularly preferable. These chain vinyl compounds and chain conjugated dienes can be used alone or in combination of two or more.
重合反応は、ラジカル重合、アニオン重合、カチオン重合等、特別な制約はないが、重合操作、後工程での水素化反応の容易さ、及び最終的に得られる炭化水素系共重合体の機械的強度を考えると、アニオン重合法が好ましい。
The polymerization reaction is not particularly limited, such as radical polymerization, anionic polymerization, and cationic polymerization. However, the polymerization operation, the ease of the hydrogenation reaction in the post-process, and the mechanical properties of the finally obtained hydrocarbon copolymer are not limited. In view of strength, the anionic polymerization method is preferable.
アニオン重合の場合には、開始剤の存在下、通常0℃~200℃、好ましくは20℃~100℃、特に好ましくは20℃~80℃の温度範囲において、塊状重合、溶液重合、スラリー重合等の方法を用いることができるが、反応熱の除去を考慮すると、溶液重合が好ましい。この場合、重合体及びその水素化物を溶解できる不活性溶媒を用いる。溶液反応で用いる不活性溶媒は、例えばn-ブタン、n-ペンタン、iso-ペンタン、n-ヘキサン、n-ヘプタン、iso-オクタン等の脂肪族炭化水素類;シクロペンタン、シクロヘキサン、メチルシクロペンタン、メチルシクロヘキサン、デカリン等の脂環式炭化水素類;ベンゼン、トルエン等の芳香族炭化水素類等が挙げられる。上記アニオン重合の開始剤としては、例えば、n-ブチルリチウム、sec-ブチルリチウム、t-ブチルリチウム、ヘキシルリチウム、フェニルリチウムなどのモノ有機リチウム、ジリチオメタン、1,4-ジオブタン、1,4-ジリチオー2-エチルシクロヘキサン等の多官能性有機リチウム化合物などが使用可能である。
In the case of anionic polymerization, bulk polymerization, solution polymerization, slurry polymerization, etc. in the temperature range of usually 0 ° C. to 200 ° C., preferably 20 ° C. to 100 ° C., particularly preferably 20 ° C. to 80 ° C. in the presence of an initiator. However, solution polymerization is preferable in view of removal of reaction heat. In this case, an inert solvent capable of dissolving the polymer and its hydride is used. Examples of the inert solvent used in the solution reaction include aliphatic hydrocarbons such as n-butane, n-pentane, iso-pentane, n-hexane, n-heptane, and iso-octane; cyclopentane, cyclohexane, methylcyclopentane, Examples thereof include alicyclic hydrocarbons such as methylcyclohexane and decalin; aromatic hydrocarbons such as benzene and toluene. Examples of the initiator for anionic polymerization include monoorganolithium such as n-butyllithium, sec-butyllithium, t-butyllithium, hexyllithium, and phenyllithium, dilithiomethane, 1,4-diobtan, 1,4-dilithiol. A polyfunctional organolithium compound such as 2-ethylcyclohexane can be used.
水素化前の共重合体の芳香環やシクロアルケン環などの不飽和環の炭素-炭素二重結合や主鎖の不飽和結合等の水素化反応を行う場合は、反応方法、反応形態に特別な制限はなく、公知の方法にしたがって行えばよいが、水素化率を高くでき、且つ水素化反応と同時に起こる重合体鎖切断反応の少ない水素化方法が好ましく、例えば、有機溶媒中、ニッケル、コバルト、鉄、チタン、ロジウム、パラジウム、白金、ルテニウム、及びレニウムから選ばれる少なくとも1つの金属を含む触媒を用いて行う方法が挙げられる。水素化反応は、通常10℃~250℃であるが、水素化率を高くでき、且つ、水素化反応と同時に起こる重合体鎖切断反応を小さくできるという理由から、好ましくは50℃~200℃、より好ましくは80℃~180℃である。また水素圧力は、通常0.1MPa~30MPaであるが、上記理由に加え、操作性の観点から、好ましくは1MPa~20MPa、より好ましくは2MPa~10MPaである。
When carrying out hydrogenation reactions such as carbon-carbon double bonds of unsaturated rings such as aromatic rings and cycloalkene rings of the copolymer before hydrogenation, and unsaturated bonds of the main chain, the reaction method and reaction form are special. There is no particular limitation, and it may be carried out according to a known method, but a hydrogenation method that can increase the hydrogenation rate and has little polymer chain scission reaction that occurs simultaneously with the hydrogenation reaction is preferable, for example, in an organic solvent, nickel, The method is performed using a catalyst containing at least one metal selected from cobalt, iron, titanium, rhodium, palladium, platinum, ruthenium, and rhenium. The hydrogenation reaction is usually from 10 ° C. to 250 ° C., but preferably from 50 ° C. to 200 ° C. because the hydrogenation rate can be increased and the polymer chain scission reaction that occurs simultaneously with the hydrogenation reaction can be reduced. More preferably, it is 80 ° C to 180 ° C. The hydrogen pressure is usually 0.1 MPa to 30 MPa, but in addition to the above reasons, it is preferably 1 MPa to 20 MPa, more preferably 2 MPa to 10 MPa from the viewpoint of operability.
このようにして得られた、水素化物の水素化率は、1H-NMRによる測定において、主鎖の炭素-炭素不飽和結合、芳香環の炭素-炭素二重結合、不飽和環の炭素-炭素二重結合のいずれも、通常90%以上、好ましくは95%以上、より好ましくは97%以上である。水素化率が低いと、得られる共重合体の低複屈折性、熱安定性等が低下する。
The hydrogenation rate of the hydride obtained in this way is determined by 1 H-NMR as measured by the main chain carbon-carbon unsaturated bond, aromatic ring carbon-carbon double bond, unsaturated ring carbon- All of the carbon double bonds are usually 90% or more, preferably 95% or more, more preferably 97% or more. When the hydrogenation rate is low, the low birefringence, thermal stability, etc. of the resulting copolymer are lowered.
水素化反応終了後に水素化物を回収する方法は特に限定されていない。通常、濾過、遠心分離等の方法により水素化触媒残渣を除去した後、水素化物の溶液から溶媒を直接乾燥により除去する方法、水素化物の溶液を水素化物にとっての貧溶媒中に注ぎ、水素化物を凝固させる方法を用いることができる。
≪サブマスター基板≫
サブマスター基板26は、サブマスター20のサブマスター成形部22のみでは強度に劣る場合でも、基板に樹脂を貼り付けることでサブマスター20の強度が上がり、何回も成形することができるという、裏打ち材のことである。 The method for recovering the hydride after completion of the hydrogenation reaction is not particularly limited. Usually, after removing the hydrogenation catalyst residue by a method such as filtration or centrifugation, the solvent is removed directly from the hydride solution by drying, the hydride solution is poured into a poor solvent for the hydride, and the hydride A method of coagulating can be used.
≪Sub-master board≫
Even if thesubmaster substrate 26 is inferior in strength only by the submaster molding portion 22 of the submaster 20, the strength of the submaster 20 can be increased by pasting resin on the substrate, and the submaster substrate 26 can be molded many times. It is a material.
≪サブマスター基板≫
サブマスター基板26は、サブマスター20のサブマスター成形部22のみでは強度に劣る場合でも、基板に樹脂を貼り付けることでサブマスター20の強度が上がり、何回も成形することができるという、裏打ち材のことである。 The method for recovering the hydride after completion of the hydrogenation reaction is not particularly limited. Usually, after removing the hydrogenation catalyst residue by a method such as filtration or centrifugation, the solvent is removed directly from the hydride solution by drying, the hydride solution is poured into a poor solvent for the hydride, and the hydride A method of coagulating can be used.
≪Sub-master board≫
Even if the
サブマスター基板26としては、石英、シリコーンウェハ、金属、ガラス、樹脂等、高い平滑性を生み出せるものなら何れでもよい。
The sub-master substrate 26 may be any material that can produce high smoothness, such as quartz, silicone wafer, metal, glass, and resin.
透明性の観点で、サブマスター20の上からでも下からでもUV照射できるという点を考慮すると、透明な型、例えば石英やガラスや透明樹脂等が好ましい。透明樹脂は、熱可塑性樹脂、熱硬化性樹脂、UV硬化性樹脂の何れでも良く、樹脂中に、微粒子が添加されていて線膨張係数を下げる等の効果があってもよい。このように樹脂を使用することによって、ガラスより撓むので離型する際により離型し易いが、樹脂は線膨張係数が大きいので、UV照射の際に熱が発生すると、形状が変形してきれいに転写することができない場合がある。従って、裏打ち材も樹脂とすることでこのような問題を回避することもできる。裏打ち材としては、強度の観点でガラス材料を用いてもよいが、その場合、上記の観点で、サブマスター成形部22を構成する樹脂と裏打ち材のを構成する材料との線膨張の差が小さいことが好ましく、線膨張係数の差が3×10-5/K以下とされることが好ましい。
From the viewpoint of transparency, considering that UV irradiation can be performed from above or below the submaster 20, a transparent mold such as quartz, glass, or transparent resin is preferable. The transparent resin may be any of a thermoplastic resin, a thermosetting resin, and a UV curable resin, and may have an effect of reducing the linear expansion coefficient by adding fine particles to the resin. By using a resin in this way, it is easier to release when it is released because it bends than glass. However, since the resin has a large coefficient of linear expansion, the shape is deformed when heat is generated during UV irradiation. It may not be possible to transfer clearly. Therefore, such a problem can also be avoided by using resin as the backing material. As the backing material, a glass material may be used from the viewpoint of strength. In that case, however, there is a difference in linear expansion between the resin constituting the submaster molding portion 22 and the material constituting the backing material from the above viewpoint. The difference is preferably small, and the difference in linear expansion coefficient is preferably 3 × 10 −5 / K or less.
次に、図3を参照しながら、ウエハレンズ1の製造方法について説明する。
Next, a method for manufacturing the wafer lens 1 will be described with reference to FIG.
図3(a)に示す通り、マスター10A上に樹脂22Aを塗布し、マスター10Aの凸部14を樹脂22Aに転写し、樹脂22Aを硬化させ、樹脂22Aに対し複数の凹部24を形成する。これにより、サブマスター成形部22が形成される。
As shown in FIG. 3A, a resin 22A is applied on the master 10A, the convex portions 14 of the master 10A are transferred to the resin 22A, the resin 22A is cured, and a plurality of concave portions 24 are formed on the resin 22A. Thereby, the sub master molding part 22 is formed.
樹脂22Aは、熱硬化性であっても光硬化性であっても、揮発硬化性(溶媒が揮発して硬化するHSQ(ハイドロゲンシルセスキオキサン等))であってもよい。高精度な成形転写性を重視する場合は、硬化に熱をかけないため樹脂22Aの熱膨張の影響が少ないUV硬化性や揮発硬化性樹脂による成形が好ましいが、これに限られるものではない。硬化後のマスター10Aとの剥離性が良い樹脂22Aが、剥離時に大きな力を必要としないため、成形光学面形状などを不用意に変形されることなくより好ましい。
The resin 22A may be thermosetting, photocurable, or volatile curable (HSQ (hydrogensilsesquioxane or the like) that is cured by volatilization of the solvent). In the case where high-precision molding transferability is important, molding with UV curable or volatile curable resin, which is less affected by thermal expansion of resin 22A, is preferable because it does not apply heat to curing, but is not limited thereto. Since the resin 22A having good releasability from the master 10A after curing does not require a large force at the time of peeling, the molded optical surface shape and the like are more preferable without being inadvertently deformed.
樹脂22A(サブマスター成形部22の材料)、樹脂5A(レンズ部5の材料)が硬化性樹脂である場合において、マスター10Aの光学面形状(凸部14)は、好ましくは樹脂22Aの硬化収縮や樹脂5Aの硬化収縮を見越して設計される。
In the case where the resin 22A (the material of the sub-master molding part 22) and the resin 5A (the material of the lens part 5) are curable resins, the optical surface shape (convex part 14) of the master 10A is preferably cure shrinkage of the resin 22A. And designed in anticipation of cure shrinkage of resin 5A.
マスター10A上に樹脂22Aを塗布する場合には、スプレーコート、スピンコート等の手法を用いる。この場合、真空引きしながら樹脂22Aを塗布してもよい。真空引きしながら樹脂22Aを塗布すれば、樹脂22Aに気泡を混入させずに樹脂22Aを硬化させることができる。
When the resin 22A is applied on the master 10A, a technique such as spray coating or spin coating is used. In this case, the resin 22A may be applied while evacuating. If the resin 22A is applied while evacuating, the resin 22A can be cured without introducing bubbles into the resin 22A.
また、マスター10A上にスプレーコート、スピンコート等をしない場合には、マスター10Aの表面に離型剤を塗布することが好ましい。
Further, when spray coating, spin coating or the like is not performed on the master 10A, it is preferable to apply a release agent to the surface of the master 10A.
離型剤を塗布する場合、マスター10Aの表面を改質する。具体的には、マスター10Aの表面にOH基を立たせる。表面を改質する方法は、UVオゾン洗浄、酸素プラズマアッシング等、マスター10Aの表面にOH基を立たせる方法であれば何でもよい。
When applying a release agent, the surface of the master 10A is modified. Specifically, an OH group is made to stand on the surface of the master 10A. The method for modifying the surface may be any method as long as OH groups are set on the surface of the master 10A, such as UV ozone cleaning and oxygen plasma ashing.
離型剤としては、シランカップリング剤構造のように、末端に加水分解可能な官能基が結合した材料、すなわち、金属の表面に存在するOH基との間で脱水縮合又は水素結合等を起こして結合するような構造を有するものが挙げられる。末端がシランカップリング構造を持ち、他端が離型性機能を持つ離型剤の場合、マスター10Aの表面にOH基が形成されていればいるほど、マスター10Aの表面において共有結合する箇所が増え、より強固な結合ができる。その結果、複数回、成形動作を実行しても、離型効果は薄れることなく、耐久性を向上させることが出来る。また、プライマー(下地層、SiO2コートなど)が不要となるので、薄膜を保ったまま耐久性向上の効果を得ることができる。
As the release agent, a material having a hydrolyzable functional group bonded to the end, such as a silane coupling agent structure, that is, dehydration condensation or hydrogen bonding with an OH group present on the metal surface is caused. And those having a structure that binds to each other. In the case of a release agent having a silane coupling structure at the end and a release function at the other end, the more OH groups are formed on the surface of the master 10A, the more covalently bonded sites are on the surface of the master 10A. Increases and allows stronger bonds. As a result, even if the molding operation is executed a plurality of times, the durability can be improved without diminishing the releasing effect. Moreover, since a primer (underlayer, SiO 2 coat, etc.) is not required, the effect of improving the durability can be obtained while keeping the thin film.
末端に加水分解可能な官能基が結合した材料とは、好ましくは官能基としてアルコキシシラン基やハロゲン化シラン基、4級アンモニウム塩、リン酸エステル基などからなる材料が挙げられる。また、末端基に、例えばトリアジンチオールのような、金型と強い結合を起こすような基でもよい。具体的には、次の一般式で示されるアルコキシシラン基(8)又はハロゲン化シラン基(9)を有するものである。
The material having a hydrolyzable functional group bonded to the terminal preferably includes a material composed of an alkoxysilane group, a halogenated silane group, a quaternary ammonium salt, a phosphate ester group or the like as a functional group. Further, the terminal group may be a group that causes a strong bond with the mold, such as triazine thiol. Specifically, it has an alkoxysilane group (8) or a halogenated silane group (9) represented by the following general formula.
-Si(OR1)nR2(3-n) (8)
-SiXmR3(3-m) (9)
ここで、R1およびR2はアルキル基(例えば、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、ブチル基など)、nおよびmは1,2または3、R3はアルキル基(例えば、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、ブチル基など)またはアルコキシ基(例えば、メトキシ基、エトキシ基、ブトキシ基など)である。Xはハロゲン原子(例えば、Cl、Br、I)である。 -Si (OR1) nR2 (3-n) (8)
-SiXmR3 (3-m) (9)
Here, R1 and R2 are alkyl groups (eg, methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl, etc.), n and m are 1, 2 or 3, and R3 is an alkyl group (eg, methyl, ethyl, propyl) Group, butyl group, etc.) or alkoxy group (for example, methoxy group, ethoxy group, butoxy group, etc.). X is a halogen atom (for example, Cl, Br, I).
-SiXmR3(3-m) (9)
ここで、R1およびR2はアルキル基(例えば、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、ブチル基など)、nおよびmは1,2または3、R3はアルキル基(例えば、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、ブチル基など)またはアルコキシ基(例えば、メトキシ基、エトキシ基、ブトキシ基など)である。Xはハロゲン原子(例えば、Cl、Br、I)である。 -Si (OR1) nR2 (3-n) (8)
-SiXmR3 (3-m) (9)
Here, R1 and R2 are alkyl groups (eg, methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl, etc.), n and m are 1, 2 or 3, and R3 is an alkyl group (eg, methyl, ethyl, propyl) Group, butyl group, etc.) or alkoxy group (for example, methoxy group, ethoxy group, butoxy group, etc.). X is a halogen atom (for example, Cl, Br, I).
また、R1、R2、R3またはXがSiに2以上結合している場合には、上記の基または原子の範囲内で、例えば2つのRmがアルキル基とアルコキシ基であるように異なっていてもよい。
Further, when two or more of R1, R2, R3 or X are bonded to Si, they may be different within the above group or atom range, for example, so that two Rm are an alkyl group and an alkoxy group. Good.
アルコキシシラン基-SiOR1およびハロゲン化シラン基-SiXは、水分と反応して-SiOHとなり、さらにこれがガラス、金属等の型材料の表面に存在するOH基との間で脱水縮合または水素結合等を起こして結合する。
The alkoxysilane group —SiOR1 and the halogenated silane group —SiX react with moisture to become —SiOH, which further undergoes dehydration condensation or hydrogen bonding with the OH group present on the surface of the mold material such as glass or metal. Wake up and join.
図12は、末端に加水分解可能な官能基の一例としてアルコキシシラン基を使用した離型剤と、マスター10A表面のOH基との反応図を示している。
FIG. 12 shows a reaction diagram of a mold release agent using an alkoxysilane group as an example of a hydrolyzable functional group at the terminal and an OH group on the surface of the master 10A.
図12(a)中、-ORはメトキシ(-OCH3)やエトキシ(-OC2H5)を表し、加水分解によりメタノール(CH3OH)やエタノール(C2H5OH)を発生して、図12(b)のシラノール(-SiOH)となる。その後、部分的に脱水縮合して、図12(c)のようにシラノールの縮合体となる。さらに、図12(d)のようにマスター10(無機材料)表面のOH基と水素結合により吸着し、最後に図12(e)のように脱水して、-O- 化学結合(共有結合)する。なお、図12ではアルコキシシラン基の場合を示したが、ハロゲン化シラン基の場合も基本的に同様の反応が起こる。
In FIG. 12A, —OR represents methoxy (—OCH 3 ) or ethoxy (—OC 2 H 5 ), and generates methanol (CH 3 OH) or ethanol (C 2 H 5 OH) by hydrolysis. Thus, silanol (-SiOH) in FIG. Thereafter, it is partially dehydrated and condensed to form a silanol condensate as shown in FIG. Further, as shown in FIG. 12 (d), it is adsorbed by OH groups and hydrogen bonds on the surface of the master 10 (inorganic material), and finally dehydrated as shown in FIG. 12 (e) to form —O—chemical bonds (covalent bonds). To do. FIG. 12 shows the case of an alkoxysilane group, but basically the same reaction occurs in the case of a halogenated silane group.
すなわち本発明に使用する離型剤は、その一端でマスター10A表面に化学結合し、他端に機能性基を配向して、マスター10Aを被うこととなり、薄くて耐久性に優れた均一な離型層を形成することができる。
That is, the mold release agent used in the present invention is chemically bonded to the surface of the master 10A at one end and the functional group is oriented at the other end to cover the master 10A, and is thin and uniform in durability. A release layer can be formed.
離型性機能を持つ側の構造として好ましいのは、表面エネルギーの低いもの、例えば、フッ素置換炭化水素基や炭化水素基である。
(フッ素系の離型剤)
フッ素置換炭化水素基としては、特に分子構造の一端にCF3(CF2)a-基や、CF3・CF3・CF(CF2)b-基などのパーフルオロ基(aおよびbは整数)を持つフッ素置換炭化水素基が好ましく、また、パーフルオロ基の長さが炭素数にして2個以上が好ましく、CF3(CF2)a-のCF3につづくCF2基の数は5以上が適切である。 A structure having a releasability function preferably has a low surface energy, such as a fluorine-substituted hydrocarbon group or a hydrocarbon group.
(Fluorine release agent)
Fluorine-substituted hydrocarbon groups include fluorine-substituted hydrocarbons that have a perfluoro group (a and b are integers) such as CF3 (CF2) a- and CF3 / CF3 / CF (CF2) b- groups at one end of the molecular structure. A hydrocarbon group is preferable, and the length of the perfluoro group is preferably 2 or more, and the number of CF2 groups following CF3 of CF3 (CF2) a- is 5 or more.
(フッ素系の離型剤)
フッ素置換炭化水素基としては、特に分子構造の一端にCF3(CF2)a-基や、CF3・CF3・CF(CF2)b-基などのパーフルオロ基(aおよびbは整数)を持つフッ素置換炭化水素基が好ましく、また、パーフルオロ基の長さが炭素数にして2個以上が好ましく、CF3(CF2)a-のCF3につづくCF2基の数は5以上が適切である。 A structure having a releasability function preferably has a low surface energy, such as a fluorine-substituted hydrocarbon group or a hydrocarbon group.
(Fluorine release agent)
Fluorine-substituted hydrocarbon groups include fluorine-substituted hydrocarbons that have a perfluoro group (a and b are integers) such as CF3 (CF2) a- and CF3 / CF3 / CF (CF2) b- groups at one end of the molecular structure. A hydrocarbon group is preferable, and the length of the perfluoro group is preferably 2 or more, and the number of CF2 groups following CF3 of CF3 (CF2) a- is 5 or more.
また、パーフルオロ基は直鎖である必要はなく、分岐構造を有していてもよい。さらに、近年の環境問題対応として、CF3(CF2)c-(CH2)d-(CF2)e-のような構造でもよい。この場合、cは3以下、dは整数(好ましくは1)、eは4以下、である。
In addition, the perfluoro group does not need to be a straight chain and may have a branched structure. Furthermore, a structure such as CF3 (CF2) c- (CH2) d- (CF2) e- may be used in response to recent environmental problems. In this case, c is 3 or less, d is an integer (preferably 1), and e is 4 or less.
上記のフッ素離型剤は通常は固体であるが、これをマスター10Aの表面に塗布するには、有機溶剤に溶解した溶液とする必要がある。離型剤の分子構造によって異なってくるが、多くはその溶媒としてフッ化炭化水素系の溶剤またはそれに若干の有機溶媒を混合したものが適している。溶媒の濃度は特に限定ないが、必要とする離型膜は特に薄いことが特徴であるので、濃度は低いもので充分であり、1~3質量%でよい。
The above-mentioned fluorine release agent is usually a solid, but in order to apply it to the surface of the master 10A, it is necessary to make it a solution dissolved in an organic solvent. Depending on the molecular structure of the release agent, a fluorinated hydrocarbon solvent or a mixture of some organic solvent is suitable as the solvent. The concentration of the solvent is not particularly limited, but the required release film is characterized by being particularly thin. Therefore, a low concentration is sufficient, and it may be 1 to 3% by mass.
この溶液をマスター10A表面に塗布するには、浸漬塗布、スプレー塗布、ハケ塗り、スピンコート等の通常の塗布方法を用いることができる。塗布後は通常は自然乾燥で溶媒を蒸発させて乾燥塗膜とするが、このとき塗布された膜厚は、20μm以下が適当である。
In order to apply this solution to the surface of the master 10A, a normal coating method such as dip coating, spray coating, brush coating, spin coating or the like can be used. After application, the solvent is evaporated by natural drying to obtain a dry coating film. The film thickness applied at this time is suitably 20 μm or less.
具体例としては、ダイキン工業製 オプツールDSX、デュラサーフHD-1100、HD-2100、住友3M製 ノベックEGC1720、竹内真空被膜製 トリアジンチオールの蒸着、AGC製 アモルファスフッ素 サイトップ グレードM、エヌアイマテリアル製 防汚コートOPC-800等が挙げられる。
(炭化水素系の離型剤)
炭化水素基としては、CnH2n+1 のように直鎖でもよいし、分岐していてもよく、シリコーン系離型剤が該当する。 Specific examples include Optool DSX from Daikin Industries, Durasurf HD-1100, HD-2100, Novec EGC1720 from Sumitomo 3M, Triazine thiol deposition from Takeuchi's vacuum coating, Amorphous fluorine Cytop grade M from AGC, Antifouling from N Material Coat OPC-800 etc. are mentioned.
(Hydrocarbon release agent)
The hydrocarbon group may be linear, such as CnH2n + 1, or may be branched, and a silicone-based mold release agent is applicable.
(炭化水素系の離型剤)
炭化水素基としては、CnH2n+1 のように直鎖でもよいし、分岐していてもよく、シリコーン系離型剤が該当する。 Specific examples include Optool DSX from Daikin Industries, Durasurf HD-1100, HD-2100, Novec EGC1720 from Sumitomo 3M, Triazine thiol deposition from Takeuchi's vacuum coating, Amorphous fluorine Cytop grade M from AGC, Antifouling from N Material Coat OPC-800 etc. are mentioned.
(Hydrocarbon release agent)
The hydrocarbon group may be linear, such as CnH2n + 1, or may be branched, and a silicone-based mold release agent is applicable.
従来、オルガノポリシロキサン樹脂を主成分とする組成物であり、撥水性を示す硬化皮膜を形成する組成物としては数多くの組成物が知られている。例えば、特開昭55-48245号公報には水酸基含有メチルポリシロキサン樹脂とα,ω-ジヒドロキシジオルガノポリシロキサンとオルガノシランからなり、硬化して離型性、防汚性に優れ、撥水性のある皮膜を形成する組成物が提案されている。また、特開昭59-140280号公報にはパーフルオロアルキル基含有オルガノシランとアミノ基含有オルガノシランを主成分とするオルガノシランの部分共加水分解縮合物を主剤とする組成物であり、撥水性、撥油性に優れた硬化皮膜を形成する組成物が提案されている。
Conventionally, a number of compositions are known as compositions having an organopolysiloxane resin as a main component and forming a cured film exhibiting water repellency. For example, JP-A-55-48245 discloses a hydroxyl group-containing methylpolysiloxane resin, α, ω-dihydroxydiorganopolysiloxane, and organosilane, which are cured to have excellent releasability and antifouling properties and water repellency. Compositions that form certain films have been proposed. Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 59-140280 discloses a composition mainly composed of a partial cohydrolyzed condensate of an organosilane mainly composed of a perfluoroalkyl group-containing organosilane and an amino group-containing organosilane. A composition that forms a cured film excellent in oil repellency has been proposed.
具体例としては、AGCセイミケミカル製 モールドスパット、マツモトファインケミカル製 オルガチックスSIC-330,434、東レダウケミカル製 SR-2410などが挙げられる。また、自己組織化単分子膜として、日本曹達製 SAMLAY が挙げられる。
Specific examples include AGC Seimi Chemical's mold spat, Matsumoto Fine Chemical's Olga Chicks SIC-330, 434, Toray Dow Chemical's SR-2410, and the like. Moreover, as a self-assembled monomolecular film, SAMLAY manufactured by Nippon Soda is cited.
図3(a)で示すように、樹脂22Aが光硬化性樹脂である場合には、マスター10Aの上方に配置した光源50を点灯させ光照射する。
As shown in FIG. 3A, when the resin 22A is a photocurable resin, the light source 50 disposed above the master 10A is turned on and irradiated with light.
光源50としては、高圧水銀ランプ、メタルハライドランプ、キセノンランプ、ハロゲンランプ、蛍光灯、ブラックライト、Gランプ、Fランプ等が挙げられ、線状光源であってもよいし点状光源であってもよい。高圧水銀ランプは、365nm、436nmに狭いスペクトルを持つランプである。メタルハライドランプは、水銀灯の一種で、紫外域における出力は高圧水銀ランプよりも数倍高い。キセノンランプは、最も太陽光に近いスペクトルを持つランプである。ハロゲンランプは長波長の光を多く含んでおり、近赤外光がほとんどであるランプである。蛍光灯は光の三原色に均等な照射強度を有している。ブラックライトはピークトップを351nmに持ち、300nm~400nmの近紫外光を放射するライトである。
Examples of the light source 50 include a high-pressure mercury lamp, a metal halide lamp, a xenon lamp, a halogen lamp, a fluorescent lamp, a black light, a G lamp, and an F lamp, and may be a linear light source or a point light source. Good. The high-pressure mercury lamp is a lamp having a narrow spectrum at 365 nm and 436 nm. A metal halide lamp is a kind of mercury lamp, and its output in the ultraviolet region is several times higher than that of a high-pressure mercury lamp. A xenon lamp is a lamp having a spectrum closest to sunlight. Halogen lamps contain a lot of long-wavelength light and are mostly near-infrared light. A fluorescent lamp has an irradiation intensity equal to the three primary colors of light. Black light has a peak top at 351 nm and emits near-ultraviolet light from 300 nm to 400 nm.
光源50から光照射される場合には、複数の線状又は点状の光源50を格子状に配置して樹脂22Aの全面に一度に光が到達するようにしてもよいし、線状又は点状の光源50を樹脂22Aの表面に対し平行にスキャニングして樹脂22Aに順次光が到達するようにしてもよい。この場合、好ましくは光照射時の輝度分布や照度(強度)分布を測定し、その測定結果に基づき照射回数、照射量、照射時間等を制御する。
When light is emitted from the light source 50, a plurality of linear or point light sources 50 may be arranged in a lattice shape so that light reaches the entire surface of the resin 22A at one time. The light source 50 may be scanned in parallel to the surface of the resin 22A so that the light sequentially reaches the resin 22A. In this case, preferably, the luminance distribution and the illuminance (intensity) distribution during light irradiation are measured, and the number of irradiations, the irradiation amount, the irradiation time, and the like are controlled based on the measurement results.
樹脂22Aを光硬化させた後(サブマスター20の作製後)においては、サブマスター20に対しポストキュア(加熱処理)を行ってもよい。ポストキュアを行えば、サブマスター20の樹脂22Aを完全に硬化させることができ、サブマスター20の型寿命を延ばすことができる。
After photocuring the resin 22A (after the production of the submaster 20), the submaster 20 may be post-cured (heat treatment). If post cure is performed, the resin 22A of the submaster 20 can be completely cured, and the mold life of the submaster 20 can be extended.
樹脂22Aが熱硬化性樹脂である場合には、加熱温度、加熱時間を最適な範囲で制御しながら樹脂22Aを加熱する。樹脂22Aは射出成形、プレス成形、光照射してその後に冷却する等の手法でも成形することができる。
When the resin 22A is a thermosetting resin, the resin 22A is heated while controlling the heating temperature and heating time within an optimal range. The resin 22A can also be molded by techniques such as injection molding, press molding, light irradiation and subsequent cooling.
図3(b)に示す通り、サブマスター成形部22(樹脂22A)の裏面(凹部24とは反対の面)に対してサブマスター基板26を装着し、サブマスター成形部22を裏打ちする。
3B, the sub master substrate 26 is mounted on the back surface (the surface opposite to the concave portion 24) of the sub master molding portion 22 (resin 22A), and the sub master molding portion 22 is lined.
サブマスター基板26は石英であってもよいし、ガラス板であってもよく、十分な曲げ強度とUV透過率を有することが重要である。サブマスター成形部22とサブマスター基板26との密着性を高めるために、サブマスター基板26に対し、シランカップリング剤を塗布するなどの処理を行ってもよい。
The sub-master substrate 26 may be quartz or a glass plate, and it is important to have sufficient bending strength and UV transmittance. In order to improve the adhesion between the sub-master molding part 22 and the sub-master substrate 26, a treatment such as applying a silane coupling agent may be performed on the sub-master substrate 26.
なお、上記のように、マスター10Aの凸部14を樹脂22Aに転写し、樹脂22Aが硬化した後(つまりサブマスター成形部22が形成された後)に、サブマスター基板26を装着する(室温で裏打ちする)場合には、接着剤を使う。
As described above, after the convex portion 14 of the master 10A is transferred to the resin 22A and the resin 22A is cured (that is, after the submaster molding portion 22 is formed), the submaster substrate 26 is mounted (room temperature). Use an adhesive.
逆に、マスター10Aの凸部14を樹脂22Aに転写し、樹脂22Aが硬化する前にサブマスター基板26を装着する(室温で裏打ちする)ようにしてもよい。この場合には、接着剤を使用せずに、樹脂22Aの付着力によりサブマスター基板26を張り付かせるか、又はサブマスター基板26にカップリング剤を塗布し付着力を強くして樹脂22Aに対しサブマスター基板26を付着させる。
Conversely, the convex portion 14 of the master 10A may be transferred to the resin 22A, and the sub-master substrate 26 may be mounted (backed at room temperature) before the resin 22A is cured. In this case, without using an adhesive, the sub-master substrate 26 is attached by the adhesive force of the resin 22A, or a coupling agent is applied to the sub-master substrate 26 to increase the adhesive force and thereby apply the resin 22A to the resin 22A. On the other hand, the sub master substrate 26 is attached.
また、サブマスター成形部22(樹脂22A)をサブマスター基板26で裏打ちする際には、公知の真空チャック装置260を用い、真空チャック装置260の吸引面260Aにサブマスター基板26を吸引保持しつつ、吸引面260Aをマスター10Aにおける凸部14の成形面に対し平行な状態として、サブマスター成形部22をサブマスター基板26で裏打ちすることが好ましい。これにより、マスター10Aにおける凸部14の成形面に対してサブマスター20の裏面20A(サブマスター基板26側の面)が平行となり、サブマスター20において凹部24の成形面が裏面20Aと平行となる。従って、後述のようにサブマスター20によってレンズ部5を成形する際に、サブマスター20の基準面、つまり裏面20Aを凹部24の成形面と平行にすることができるため、レンズ部5が偏芯したり、厚みにばらつきを有したりするのを防止し、レンズ部5の形状精度を向上させることができる。また、真空チャック装置260によってサブマスター20を吸引して保持するため、真空排気のオン/オフのみによってサブマスター20を着脱することができる。従って、サブマスター20の配置を容易に行うことができる。
Further, when backing the sub master molding portion 22 (resin 22A) with the sub master substrate 26, a known vacuum chuck device 260 is used, and the sub master substrate 26 is sucked and held on the suction surface 260A of the vacuum chuck device 260. The sub master molding portion 22 is preferably lined with the sub master substrate 26 with the suction surface 260A parallel to the molding surface of the convex portion 14 in the master 10A. Thereby, the back surface 20A of the sub master 20 (surface on the sub master substrate 26 side) is parallel to the molding surface of the convex portion 14 in the master 10A, and the molding surface of the recess 24 in the sub master 20 is parallel to the back surface 20A. . Therefore, when the lens unit 5 is molded by the submaster 20 as will be described later, the reference surface of the submaster 20, that is, the back surface 20 </ b> A can be made parallel to the molding surface of the recess 24. And variation in thickness can be prevented, and the shape accuracy of the lens unit 5 can be improved. Further, since the sub master 20 is sucked and held by the vacuum chuck device 260, the sub master 20 can be attached and detached only by turning on / off the vacuum exhaust. Therefore, the sub master 20 can be easily arranged.
ここで、凹部24の成形面に対して裏面20Aが平行であるとは、具体的には、凹部24の成形面における中心軸に対して裏面20Aが垂直であることをいう。
Here, that the back surface 20A is parallel to the molding surface of the recess 24 specifically means that the back surface 20A is perpendicular to the central axis of the molding surface of the recess 24.
また、サブマスター20は、サブマスター基板26で裏打ちしつつ硬化させて形成するのが好ましいが、裏打ち前に硬化させて形成しても良い。サブマスター基板26で裏打ちしつつ硬化させる方法としては、例えば樹脂22Aとして熱硬化性樹脂を用い、マスター10Aとサブマスター基板26との間に樹脂22Aを充填した状態でこれらをベーク炉に投入する方法や、樹脂22AとしてUV硬化性樹脂を用いるとともに、サブマスター基板26としてUV透過性の基板を用い、マスター10Aとサブマスター基板26との間に樹脂22Aを充填した状態でサブマスター基板26の側から樹脂22Aに対してUV光を照射する方法などがある。
The sub master 20 is preferably formed by being cured while being lined with the sub master substrate 26, but may be formed by being cured before being lined. As a method of curing while backing the sub master substrate 26, for example, a thermosetting resin is used as the resin 22A, and these are put into a baking furnace in a state where the resin 22A is filled between the master 10A and the sub master substrate 26. Method, and using a UV curable resin as the resin 22A, using a UV transmissive substrate as the sub master substrate 26, and filling the resin 22A between the master 10A and the sub master substrate 26, the sub master substrate 26 There is a method of irradiating the resin 22A with UV light from the side.
また、真空チャック装置260の吸引面260Aはセラミック材料で作るのが好ましい。この場合には、吸引面260Aの硬度が高くなり、サブマスター20(サブマスター基板26)の着脱によって吸引面260Aに傷が付き難いため、吸引面260Aの面精度を高く維持することができる。また、このようなセラミック材料としては、窒化珪素やサイアロンを用いるのが好ましい。この場合には、線膨張係数が1.3ppmと小さいため、温度変化に対して吸引面260Aの平面度を高く維持することができる。
Further, the suction surface 260A of the vacuum chuck device 260 is preferably made of a ceramic material. In this case, the hardness of the suction surface 260A is increased, and the suction surface 260A is not easily damaged by the attachment / detachment of the submaster 20 (submaster substrate 26), so that the surface accuracy of the suction surface 260A can be maintained high. Moreover, it is preferable to use silicon nitride or sialon as such a ceramic material. In this case, since the linear expansion coefficient is as small as 1.3 ppm, the flatness of the suction surface 260A can be kept high with respect to the temperature change.
なお、本実施の形態においては、マスター10Aにおける凸部14の成形面に対して吸引面260Aを平行な状態にする手法としては、以下のような手法を用いている。
In the present embodiment, the following method is used as a method for bringing the suction surface 260A in parallel with the molding surface of the convex portion 14 in the master 10A.
まず、マスター10Aの表裏面を高精度に平行化しておく。これにより、マスター10Aにおいて、凸部14の成形面と裏面とが平行となる。
First, the front and back surfaces of the master 10A are parallelized with high accuracy. Thereby, in the master 10A, the shaping | molding surface and back surface of the convex part 14 become parallel.
また、マスター10Aを裏面(凸部14とは反対側の面)側から支持する支持面260Bと、吸引面260Aとに対して、それぞれ基準部材260C,260Dを突設しておく。ここで、これらの基準部材260C,260Dの形状は、支持面260B及び吸引面260Aが互いに平行な状態でマスター10Aとサブマスター20とが当接したときにガタツキが無く互いに当接する形状とする。
Further, reference members 260C and 260D are provided so as to protrude from the support surface 260B that supports the master 10A from the back surface (surface opposite to the convex portion 14) and the suction surface 260A, respectively. Here, the shapes of these reference members 260C and 260D are such that there is no backlash when the master 10A and the sub-master 20 come into contact with each other with the support surface 260B and the suction surface 260A in parallel with each other.
これにより、基準部材260C、260D同士を当接させることによって、吸引面260Aに対してマスター10Aの支持面260B、ひいてはマスター10における凸部14の成形面が平行となる。
Thereby, by bringing the reference members 260C and 260D into contact with each other, the support surface 260B of the master 10A, and consequently the molding surface of the convex portion 14 in the master 10, becomes parallel to the suction surface 260A.
但し、このような手法において、基準部材は、支持面260B及び吸引面260Aの少なくとも一方に設ければ良く、例えば支持面260Bのみに基準部材を設ける場合には、基準部材の形状は、支持面260B及び吸引面260Aが互いに平行な状態でマスター10Aとサブマスター20とが当接したときに、吸引面260Aに対してガタツキが無く当接する形状とすれば良い。同様に、吸引面260Aのみに基準部材を設ける場合には、基準部材の形状は、支持面260B及び吸引面260Aが互いに平行な状態でマスター10Aとサブマスター20とが当接したときに、支持面260Bに対してガタツキが無く当接する形状とすれば良い。
However, in such a method, the reference member may be provided on at least one of the support surface 260B and the suction surface 260A. For example, when the reference member is provided only on the support surface 260B, the shape of the reference member is the support surface. When the master 10A and the sub master 20 are in contact with each other in a state where the 260B and the suction surface 260A are parallel to each other, the shape may be such that the suction surface 260A contacts with no backlash. Similarly, when the reference member is provided only on the suction surface 260A, the shape of the reference member is such that the support surface 260B and the suction surface 260A are supported when the master 10A and the sub master 20 are in contact with each other. What is necessary is just to make it the shape which does not rattle with respect to the surface 260B, and contact | abuts.
図3(c)に示す通り、マスター10Aからサブマスター成形部22とサブマスター基板26とを離型し、サブマスター20が形成される。
As shown in FIG. 3C, the sub master 20 is formed by releasing the sub master molding portion 22 and the sub master substrate 26 from the master 10A.
樹脂22AとしてPDMS(ポリジメチルシロキサン)などの樹脂を使うと、マスター10との離型性がよいので、マスター10からの剥離に大きな力を必要とせず、成形光学面を歪ませたりする事が無いのでよい。
If a resin such as PDMS (polydimethylsiloxane) is used as the resin 22A, the releasability from the master 10 is good, so that a large force is not required for peeling from the master 10, and the molding optical surface may be distorted. There is no need.
図3(d)に示す通り、サブマスター20とガラス基板3との間に樹脂5Aを充填して硬化させる。より詳細には、サブマスター20の凹部24に対し樹脂5Aを充填し、その上方からガラス基板3を押圧しながら樹脂5Aを硬化させる。
As shown in FIG. 3D, a resin 5A is filled between the sub-master 20 and the glass substrate 3 and cured. More specifically, the resin 5A is filled in the recess 24 of the submaster 20, and the resin 5A is cured while pressing the glass substrate 3 from above.
サブマスター20の凹部24に樹脂5Aを充填する場合には、サブマスター20に対し樹脂5Aをスプレーコート、スピンコート等の手法を用いる。この場合、真空引きしながら樹脂5Aを充填してもよい。真空引きしながら樹脂5Aを充填すれば、樹脂5Aに気泡を混入させずに樹脂5Aを硬化させることができる。
When filling the concave portion 24 of the sub master 20 with the resin 5A, the resin 5A is sprayed on the sub master 20 using a technique such as spray coating or spin coating. In this case, the resin 5A may be filled while evacuating. If the resin 5A is filled while evacuating, the resin 5A can be cured without introducing bubbles into the resin 5A.
サブマスター20の凹部24に樹脂5Aを充填するのに代えて、ガラス基板3に樹脂5Aを塗布し、樹脂5Aが塗布されたガラス基板3をサブマスター20に押圧するような構成としてもよい。
Instead of filling the concave portion 24 of the submaster 20 with the resin 5A, the resin 5A may be applied to the glass substrate 3, and the glass substrate 3 coated with the resin 5A may be pressed against the submaster 20.
ガラス基板3を押圧する場合に、ガラス基板3は、サブマスター20と軸合わせをするための構造が付与されているのが好ましい。ガラス基板3が円形状を呈している場合には、例えばDカット、Iカット、マーキング、切欠き部等を形成しておくのが好ましい。ガラス基板3を多角形状としてもよく、この場合にはサブマスター20との軸合わせが容易である。
When the glass substrate 3 is pressed, the glass substrate 3 is preferably provided with a structure for axial alignment with the submaster 20. When the glass substrate 3 has a circular shape, for example, it is preferable to form a D cut, an I cut, a marking, a notch, or the like. The glass substrate 3 may have a polygonal shape, and in this case, the axis alignment with the submaster 20 is easy.
樹脂5Aを硬化させる場合には、サブマスター20の下方に配置した光源52を点灯させサブマスター20側から光照射してもよいし、ガラス基板3の上方に配置した光源54を点灯させガラス基板3側から光照射してもよいし、光源52、54の両方を同時に点灯させサブマスター20側とガラス基板3側との両側から光照射してもよい。
When the resin 5A is to be cured, the light source 52 disposed below the sub master 20 may be turned on to emit light from the sub master 20 side, or the light source 54 disposed above the glass substrate 3 may be turned on to turn on the glass substrate. The light may be irradiated from the 3 side, or both the light sources 52 and 54 may be turned on simultaneously and the light may be irradiated from both the sub master 20 side and the glass substrate 3 side.
光源52、54としては、上述した光源50と同様の高圧水銀ランプ、メタルハライドランプ、キセノンランプ、ハロゲンランプ、蛍光灯、ブラックライト、Gランプ、Fランプ等を使用でき、線状光源であってもよいし点状光源であってもよい。
As the light sources 52 and 54, the same high pressure mercury lamp, metal halide lamp, xenon lamp, halogen lamp, fluorescent lamp, black light, G lamp, and F lamp as the light source 50 described above can be used. It may be a point light source.
光源52、54から光照射する場合には、複数の線状又は点状の光源52、54を格子状に配置して樹脂5Aに一度に光が到達するようにしてもよいし、線状又は点状の光源52、54をサブマスター20、ガラス基板3に対し平行にスキャニングして樹脂5Aに順次光が到達するようにしてもよい。この場合、好ましくは光照射時の輝度分布や照度(強度)分布を測定し、その測定結果に基づき照射回数、照射量、照射時間等を制御する。
When irradiating light from the light sources 52 and 54, a plurality of linear or point light sources 52 and 54 may be arranged in a lattice shape so that the light reaches the resin 5A at a time. The point light sources 52 and 54 may be scanned in parallel to the sub master 20 and the glass substrate 3 so that the light sequentially reaches the resin 5A. In this case, preferably, the luminance distribution and the illuminance (intensity) distribution during light irradiation are measured, and the number of irradiations, the irradiation amount, the irradiation time, and the like are controlled based on the measurement results.
樹脂5Aが硬化すると、レンズ部5が形成される。その後、レンズ部5とガラス基板3とをサブマスター20から離型し、ウエハレンズ1が製造される(ウエハレンズ1はガラス基板3の表面にのみレンズ部5が形成されたものである。)。
When the resin 5A is cured, the lens portion 5 is formed. Thereafter, the lens unit 5 and the glass substrate 3 are released from the sub-master 20 to manufacture the wafer lens 1 (the wafer lens 1 has the lens unit 5 formed only on the surface of the glass substrate 3). .
ウエハレンズ1をサブマスター20から離型する場合に、予めウエハレンズ1(ガラス基板3)とサブマスター20との間に引張りシロ60を設けておき(図3(b)参照)、引張りシロ60を引っ張ることでウエハレンズ1をサブマスター20から離型するようにしてもよい。
When the wafer lens 1 is released from the sub master 20, a tension white 60 is provided between the wafer lens 1 (glass substrate 3) and the sub master 20 in advance (see FIG. 3B). The wafer lens 1 may be released from the sub master 20 by pulling.
サブマスター20のサブマスター基板26が弾性素材(樹脂)である場合には、これをやや折り曲げてウエハレンズ1をサブマスター20から離型するようにしてもよいし、ガラス基板3がガラスに代わり弾性素材(樹脂)である場合にも、これをやや折り曲げてウエハレンズ1をサブマスター20から離型するようにしてもよい。
When the sub-master substrate 26 of the sub-master 20 is an elastic material (resin), the wafer lens 1 may be released from the sub-master 20 by bending it slightly, or the glass substrate 3 is replaced with glass. Even in the case of an elastic material (resin), the wafer lens 1 may be released from the sub master 20 by slightly bending it.
ウエハレンズ1をサブマスター20からやや剥離して両部材間に隙間が形成されたら、エア又は純水をその隙間に圧送に、ウエハレンズ1をサブマスター20から離型するようにしてもよい。
When the wafer lens 1 is slightly separated from the sub master 20 and a gap is formed between both members, air or pure water may be pumped into the gap and the wafer lens 1 may be released from the sub master 20.
なお、以上の説明ではガラス基板3の片面にレンズ部5を設ける方法について説明したが、両面に設ける場合には、まず、ガラス基板3の一方の面のレンズ部5の光学面形状に対応するポジ形状の成形面を複数有するマスター(図示せず)と、他方の面のレンズ部5の光学面形状に対応するポジ形状の成形面を複数有するマスターとを用意し、これらの各マスターを用いてサブマスター20C、20D(図3(e)、(f)参照)を形成する。これによりサブマスター20Cはガラス基板3の一方の面のレンズ部5の光学面形状に対応するネガ形状の成形面を有し、サブマスター20Dは他方の面のレンズ部5の光学面形状に対応するネガ形状の成形面を有することとなる。そして、各サブマスター20C、20Dと、ガラス基板3との間に樹脂5Aを充填した後、樹脂5Aを硬化させてガラス基板3の両面にレンズ部5を成形する。これによれば、ガラス基板3の片面だけで樹脂5Aが硬化して収縮することなく、両面で樹脂5Aが同時に硬化・収縮してそれぞれレンズ部5となるため、各面に順にレンズ部5を設ける場合と異なり、ガラス基板3の反りを防止することができるため、レンズ部5の形状精度を向上させることができる。
In the above description, the method of providing the lens unit 5 on one side of the glass substrate 3 has been described. However, when the lens unit 5 is provided on both sides, first, it corresponds to the optical surface shape of the lens unit 5 on one side of the glass substrate 3. A master (not shown) having a plurality of positive molding surfaces and a master having a plurality of positive molding surfaces corresponding to the optical surface shape of the lens portion 5 on the other surface are prepared, and each of these masters is used. Thus, the sub masters 20C and 20D (see FIGS. 3E and 3F) are formed. Accordingly, the sub master 20C has a negative molding surface corresponding to the optical surface shape of the lens portion 5 on one surface of the glass substrate 3, and the sub master 20D corresponds to the optical surface shape of the lens portion 5 on the other surface. Will have a negative shaped molding surface. And after filling resin 5A between each submaster 20C and 20D and the glass substrate 3, the resin 5A is hardened and the lens part 5 is shape | molded on both surfaces of the glass substrate 3. FIG. According to this, the resin 5A does not cure and shrink on only one side of the glass substrate 3, and the resin 5A cures and shrinks simultaneously on both sides to become the lens portions 5, respectively. Unlike the case where it provides, since the curvature of the glass substrate 3 can be prevented, the shape accuracy of the lens part 5 can be improved.
また、ガラス基板3の両面にレンズ部5を形成する場合には、両面に光照射して樹脂5Aを硬化させた後に、加熱する工程(ポストキュア工程)を設けてもよい。ポストキュア工程を設けることで、サブマスターから取り出し後にレンズ部5が硬化収縮することで精度が低下することを抑制でき、より転写精度が向上する。また、ガラス基板3の両面に各サブマスター20C、20Dを設けた状態で一旦加熱し、サブマスターから離型した後に再度加熱する工程を設けてもよい。このような構成によれば、最初の加熱工程で硬化収縮をある程度抑制することが可能であり、再度加熱することでレンズの硬度を上げることができるとともに、サブマスター型を使用している時間を短縮することが可能となる為、製造効率を高めることができる。また、ガラス基板3の両面に各サブマスター型20C、20Dを設けた状態で、異なる温度で複数回の加熱工程を設けることも好ましい。1度目の加熱工程では比較的低い温度で加熱することで硬化を促進し、取り出し後の硬化収縮を抑制することが可能となり、更に2度目の加熱工程で比較的1度目の加熱工程よりも高い温度で加熱することにより、サブマスターからの離型性を高めることが可能となる。
Further, when the lens portions 5 are formed on both surfaces of the glass substrate 3, a heating step (post-cure step) may be provided after the resin 5A is cured by irradiating light on both surfaces. By providing the post-cure process, it is possible to suppress a decrease in accuracy due to the curing and shrinkage of the lens unit 5 after taking out from the sub master, and the transfer accuracy is further improved. Moreover, the process which once heats in the state which provided each submaster 20C and 20D in the both surfaces of the glass substrate 3, releases from a submaster, and heats again may be provided. According to such a configuration, curing shrinkage can be suppressed to some extent in the first heating step, and the hardness of the lens can be increased by heating again, and the time for using the submaster mold can be increased. Since it becomes possible to shorten, manufacturing efficiency can be improved. It is also preferable to provide a plurality of heating steps at different temperatures in a state where the sub-master molds 20C and 20D are provided on both surfaces of the glass substrate 3. In the first heating process, it is possible to accelerate curing by heating at a relatively low temperature, and to suppress curing shrinkage after removal, and in the second heating process, it is relatively higher than the first heating process. By heating at a temperature, it becomes possible to improve the releasability from the submaster.
ここで、サブマスター20C、20Dとガラス基板3との間に樹脂5Aを充填するには、2通りの手法を用いることができる。
Here, in order to fill the resin 5A between the sub-masters 20C and 20D and the glass substrate 3, two methods can be used.
1つ目の手法では、図3(e),(f)に示すように、サブマスター20Cの上面に樹脂5Aを滴下または吐出した後、サブマスター20Cと、その上方に配設されたガラス基板3とを当接させて、これらガラス基板3及びサブマスター20Cの間に樹脂5Aを充填した状態にした後、ガラス基板3及びサブマスター20Cを互いに当接した状態で一体的に上下反転させる。そして、サブマスター20Dの上面に樹脂5Aを滴下または吐出した後、サブマスター20Dと、その上方に配設されたガラス基板3とを当接させて、これらガラス基板3及びサブマスター20Dの間に樹脂5Aを充填した状態にする。
In the first method, as shown in FIGS. 3E and 3F, after the resin 5A is dropped or discharged onto the upper surface of the submaster 20C, the submaster 20C and the glass substrate disposed above the submaster 20C are disposed. 3 and the glass substrate 3 and the sub-master 20C are filled with the resin 5A, and then the glass substrate 3 and the sub-master 20C are integrally turned upside down in a state of contacting each other. And after dripping or discharging the resin 5A onto the upper surface of the sub master 20D, the sub master 20D is brought into contact with the glass substrate 3 disposed above the sub master 20D, and the glass substrate 3 and the sub master 20D are brought into contact with each other. The resin 5A is filled.
2つ目の手法では、ガラス基板3の上面に樹脂5Aを滴下または吐出した後、ガラス基板3と、その上方に配設されたサブマスター20Cとを当接させて、これらガラス基板3及びサブマスター20Cの間に樹脂5Aを充填した状態にするとともに、サブマスター20Dの上面に樹脂5Aを滴下または吐出した後、サブマスター20Dと、その上方に配設されたガラス基板3とを当接させて、これらガラス基板3及びサブマスター20Dの間に樹脂5Aを充填した状態にする。
In the second method, after the resin 5A is dropped or discharged onto the upper surface of the glass substrate 3, the glass substrate 3 and the sub master 20C disposed above the glass substrate 3 are brought into contact with each other. The resin 5A is filled between the masters 20C, and after the resin 5A is dropped or discharged onto the upper surface of the submaster 20D, the submaster 20D is brought into contact with the glass substrate 3 disposed thereabove. Then, the resin 5A is filled between the glass substrate 3 and the sub master 20D.
なお、ガラス基板3とサブマスター20C、20Dとを当接させる際には、間に気泡が残らないようにすることが好ましい。また、ここで用いる樹脂5Aとしては、熱硬化性樹脂であっても、UV硬化性樹脂であっても、揮発硬化性樹脂(HSQなど)であっても良い。UV硬化性樹脂を用いる場合には、サブマスター20C、20Dの少なくとも一方を紫外線透過性としておくことにより、一方のサブマスターの側からガラス基板3の両面の樹脂5Aに対していっぺんに紫外線を照射することができる。
It should be noted that when the glass substrate 3 and the sub-masters 20C and 20D are brought into contact with each other, it is preferable that no bubbles remain. The resin 5A used here may be a thermosetting resin, a UV curable resin, or a volatile curable resin (HSQ or the like). When a UV curable resin is used, at least one of the sub-masters 20C and 20D is made to be UV transmissive so that the UV light is irradiated on the resin 5A on both surfaces of the glass substrate 3 from one sub-master side at a time. be able to.
ここで、ガラス基板3の表裏両面にレンズ部5を形成する場合に、図7に示す通りにサブマスター20を縦横2倍ずつ(倍率は変更可能である。)大きくしたような一体型の大径サブマスター200と、図8の通常のサブマスター20とを準備する。そして、ガラス基板3の表面にレンズ部5を形成する場合にはサブマスター200を使用し、その反対側の裏面にレンズ部5を形成する場合にはサブマスター20を複数回にわたり使用するようにしてもよい。
Here, when the lens portions 5 are formed on both the front and back surfaces of the glass substrate 3, as shown in FIG. 7, the sub master 20 is doubled vertically and horizontally (magnification can be changed). The diameter submaster 200 and the normal submaster 20 of FIG. 8 are prepared. When the lens unit 5 is formed on the surface of the glass substrate 3, the sub master 200 is used, and when the lens unit 5 is formed on the reverse side, the sub master 20 is used a plurality of times. May be.
具体的には、ガラス基板3の表面に対しては大径サブマスター200を用いてレンズ部5を一括で形成する。その後のガラス基板3の裏面に対しては、図9に示す通り、サブマスター20を大径サブマスター200の1/4区画ずつそれぞれずらしながら4回にわたりサブマスター20を用いてレンズ部5を形成する。このような構成によれば、大径サブマスター200を用いて形成したレンズ部5を有するガラス基板3に対し、サブマスター20の軸合わせが容易となり、大径サブマスター200を用いて形成したレンズ部5と、サブマスター20を用いて形成したレンズ部5とがガラス基板3の表裏において配置がずれるといった事態を抑えることができる。
Specifically, the lens portion 5 is formed in a lump on the surface of the glass substrate 3 using the large-diameter submaster 200. On the back surface of the glass substrate 3 thereafter, as shown in FIG. 9, the lens unit 5 is formed by using the submaster 20 four times while shifting the submaster 20 by a quarter of the large-diameter submaster 200. To do. According to such a configuration, the axis alignment of the sub master 20 is easy with respect to the glass substrate 3 having the lens portion 5 formed using the large-diameter submaster 200, and the lens formed using the large-diameter submaster 200. It is possible to suppress a situation in which the portion 5 and the lens portion 5 formed using the sub master 20 are misaligned on the front and back of the glass substrate 3.
ただし、大径サブマスター200を使用する場合には、図10上段から下段に示す通り、サブマスター成形部22に対しやや反りが発生する可能性があり、型としての本来の機能を発揮することができない場合もある。そこで、図11に示す通り大径サブマスター200を分割するように中央部に十字状に樹脂22Aが存在しない領域(応力緩和部210)を設けて、大径サブマスター200のサブマスター成形部22の反りの発生を抑える(ガラス基板3との応力を緩和する)ような構成とするのが好ましい。応力緩和部210は、本実施の形態のように樹脂22Aが存在しない領域としてもよいし、樹脂が薄く形成されていてもよい。また、応力緩和部210は、幾つかのレンズ成形部おきに設けられていてもよいし、各レンズ成形部を囲むように設けられていてもよい。このような応力緩和部設けた場合は、サブマスター20の反りを抑制することに加え、収縮による面方向の位置ずれや成形精度の低下も抑制することが可能となる。
However, when using the large-diameter submaster 200, as shown in the upper to lower stages of FIG. 10, there is a possibility that the submaster molding portion 22 may be slightly warped, so that the original function as a mold is exhibited. May not be possible. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 11, a region (stress relaxation portion 210) in which the resin 22 </ b> A does not exist in a cross shape is provided in the center so as to divide the large-diameter submaster 200, and the submaster molding portion 22 of the large-diameter submaster 200 It is preferable to adopt a configuration that suppresses the occurrence of warping (relaxes stress with the glass substrate 3). The stress relaxation unit 210 may be a region where the resin 22A does not exist as in the present embodiment, or the resin may be formed thin. Moreover, the stress relaxation part 210 may be provided every several lens shaping | molding parts, and may be provided so that each lens shaping | molding part may be enclosed. When such a stress relieving part is provided, in addition to suppressing the warpage of the submaster 20, it is also possible to suppress a displacement in the surface direction and a decrease in molding accuracy due to shrinkage.
応力緩和部210を設ける場合において、例えば樹脂22Aが光硬化性樹脂であるときには、ガラス基板3又はサブマスター基板26をマスキングして光の未照射部を形成したり、光源52,54をマスキングして光の未照射部を形成したりすればよい。
In the case where the stress relieving portion 210 is provided, for example, when the resin 22A is a photocurable resin, the glass substrate 3 or the sub master substrate 26 is masked to form an unirradiated portion, or the light sources 52 and 54 are masked. Thus, an unirradiated portion of light may be formed.
なお、マスター10Aに代えてマスター10Bを用い、サブマスター20を作製せずに、マスター10Bから直接的にウエハレンズ1を作製してもよい。
Note that the master 10B may be used in place of the master 10A, and the wafer lens 1 may be manufactured directly from the master 10B without manufacturing the sub-master 20.
この場合、マスター10Bの凹部16に対し樹脂5Aを充填し、その上方からガラス基板3を押圧しながら樹脂5Aを硬化させ、その後ガラス基板3とレンズ部5とをマスター10Bから離型すればよい。
In this case, the recess 5 of the master 10B is filled with the resin 5A, the resin 5A is cured while pressing the glass substrate 3 from above, and then the glass substrate 3 and the lens unit 5 are released from the master 10B. .
マスター10Bから樹脂5Aを剥離するための離型が重要であり、その離型方法として2種類の方法が考えられる。
The mold release for peeling the resin 5A from the master 10B is important, and two types of mold release methods are conceivable.
第1の方法として、樹脂5Aに離型剤を添加する。この場合、後工程である反射防止コートの密着性が低下したり、ガラス基板3との付着性が低下したりするので、好ましくはカップリング剤などをガラス基板3に塗布して付着力を強化する。
As a first method, a release agent is added to the resin 5A. In this case, the adhesion of the anti-reflection coating, which is a subsequent process, is lowered, or the adhesion to the glass substrate 3 is lowered. Preferably, a coupling agent or the like is applied to the glass substrate 3 to enhance the adhesion. To do.
第2の方法として、マスター10Bの表面に離型剤をコートする。離型剤としては、トリアジンジチオールやフッ素系、シリコン系の単分子層を形成する離型剤を用いることができる。離型剤を用いることで、成膜厚さが10nm程度と、光学面形状に影響を与えない厚みにコートできる。離型剤が成形時にはがれないように密着性を高めるため、カップリング剤をマスター10Bに塗布したり、離型剤とマスター10Bとの間で架橋を創製するSiO2などをマスター10Bにコートしたりすると、密着性が強くなってよい。
[第2の実施形態]
第2の実施形態は主には第1の実施形態と下記の点で異なっており、それ以外は略同じとなっている。 As a second method, a release agent is coated on the surface of themaster 10B. As the release agent, triazine dithiol, a release agent that forms a fluorine-based or silicon-based monomolecular layer can be used. By using a release agent, it is possible to coat the film to a thickness that does not affect the optical surface shape, with a film thickness of about 10 nm. In order to increase the adhesion so that the release agent does not peel off during molding, the coupling agent is applied to the master 10B, or the master 10B is coated with SiO 2 or the like that creates a bridge between the release agent and the master 10B. If done, the adhesion may be increased.
[Second Embodiment]
The second embodiment is mainly different from the first embodiment in the following points, and is otherwise substantially the same.
[第2の実施形態]
第2の実施形態は主には第1の実施形態と下記の点で異なっており、それ以外は略同じとなっている。 As a second method, a release agent is coated on the surface of the
[Second Embodiment]
The second embodiment is mainly different from the first embodiment in the following points, and is otherwise substantially the same.
ウエハレンズ1の製造にあたって、成形用の型として、図4に示すマスター10、サブマスター30、サブサブマスター40が使用される。第1の実施形態では、マスター10(10A)からウエハレンズ1を製造するのにサブマスター20を使用したのに対し、第2の実施形態では、主に、マスター10(10B)からウエハレンズ1を製造するのにサブマスター30、サブサブマスター40の2つの型を使用する点が異なっている。特に、マスター10Bからサブマスター30を作製する工程やサブサブマスター40からウエハレンズ1を製造する工程は第1の実施形態と略同じであり、サブマスター30からサブサブマスター40を作製する点が第1の実施形態と異なっている。
When the wafer lens 1 is manufactured, a master 10, a sub master 30, and a sub sub master 40 shown in FIG. 4 are used as molds for molding. In the first embodiment, the sub-master 20 is used to manufacture the wafer lens 1 from the master 10 (10A), whereas in the second embodiment, the wafer lens 1 is mainly from the master 10 (10B). The difference is that two types of sub-master 30 and sub-sub-master 40 are used to manufacture the sub-master. In particular, the process of manufacturing the sub master 30 from the master 10B and the process of manufacturing the wafer lens 1 from the sub sub master 40 are substantially the same as in the first embodiment, and the first is that the sub sub master 40 is manufactured from the sub master 30. This is different from the embodiment.
図4に示す通り、マスター10Bは直方体状のベース部12に対し複数の凹部16がアレイ状に形成された型である。凹部16の形状はウエハレンズ1のレンズ部5に対応するネガ形状となっており、この図では略半球形状に凹んでいる。
As shown in FIG. 4, the master 10 </ b> B is a mold in which a plurality of concave portions 16 are formed in an array shape with respect to a rectangular parallelepiped base portion 12. The shape of the concave portion 16 is a negative shape corresponding to the lens portion 5 of the wafer lens 1, and is concave in a substantially hemispherical shape in this figure.
マスター10Bは、ニッケルリンやアルミ合金、快削真鋳などの材料をダイアモンド切削により高精度に光学面を切削創製されたものであってもよいし、超硬などの高硬度材料を研削加工して創製されたものでもあってもよい。マスター10Bで創製される光学面は、好ましくは図4に示す通りに複数の凹部16がアレイ状に配置されたものであり、単一の凹部16のみが配置されたものであってもよい。
The master 10B may be formed by cutting an optical surface with high accuracy by diamond cutting of a material such as nickel phosphorus, aluminum alloy, free-cutting cast metal, or grinding a high-hardness material such as carbide. It may also have been created. The optical surface created by the master 10B is preferably one in which a plurality of recesses 16 are arranged in an array as shown in FIG. 4, and only a single recess 16 may be arranged.
図4に示す通り、サブマスター30はサブマスター成形部32とサブマスター基板36とで構成されている。サブマスター成形部32には複数の凸部34がアレイ状に形成されている。凸部34の形状はウエハレンズ1のレンズ部5に対応するポジ形状となっており、この図では略半球形状に突出している。このサブマスター成形部32は、樹脂32Aによって形成されている。
As shown in FIG. 4, the submaster 30 includes a submaster molding portion 32 and a submaster substrate 36. A plurality of convex portions 34 are formed in an array on the sub master molding portion 32. The shape of the convex portion 34 is a positive shape corresponding to the lens portion 5 of the wafer lens 1 and protrudes in a substantially hemispherical shape in this figure. The sub master molding part 32 is formed of a resin 32A.
樹脂32Aは、基本的に第1の実施の形態のサブマスター20の樹脂22Aと同様の材料を使用することができるが、特に離型性かつ耐熱性があり、線膨張係数が小さな樹脂(すなわち、表面エネルギーが小さな樹脂)を使用することが好ましい。具体的には、上述の光硬化性樹脂、熱硬化性樹脂及び熱可塑性樹脂のいずれでも良く、透明又は不透明でもよいが、例えば、熱硬化性樹脂であれば上述のフッ素系樹脂にすることが必要である。シリコーン系樹脂にすると線膨張係数が大きいので、サブサブマスター40に熱転写する場合に変形して、微細構造を正確に転写できないためである。
The resin 32A can basically use the same material as the resin 22A of the sub-master 20 of the first embodiment, but is particularly releasable and heat resistant, and has a small linear expansion coefficient (ie It is preferable to use a resin having a small surface energy. Specifically, any of the above-mentioned photo-curing resin, thermosetting resin, and thermoplastic resin may be used, and it may be transparent or opaque. For example, if it is a thermosetting resin, the above-mentioned fluorine-based resin may be used. is necessary. This is because when the silicone resin is used, the coefficient of linear expansion is large, so that it deforms when thermally transferred to the sub-submaster 40, and the fine structure cannot be accurately transferred.
サブマスター基板36は、サブマスター基板26と同様の材料を使用することができる。
The same material as the sub master substrate 26 can be used for the sub master substrate 36.
図4に示す通り、サブサブマスター40はサブサブマスター成形部42とサブサブマスター基板46とで構成されている。サブサブマスター成形部42には複数の凹部44がアレイ状に形成されている。凹部44はウエハレンズ1のレンズ部5に対応する部位であり、略半球形状に凹んでいる。このサブサブマスター成形部42は、樹脂42Aによって形成されている。
As shown in FIG. 4, the sub-sub master 40 includes a sub-sub master molding portion 42 and a sub-sub master substrate 46. A plurality of recesses 44 are formed in an array in the sub-submaster molding part 42. The concave portion 44 is a portion corresponding to the lens portion 5 of the wafer lens 1 and is concave in a substantially hemispherical shape. The sub-sub master molding part 42 is formed of a resin 42A.
樹脂42Aも、第1の実施の形態のサブマスター20の樹脂22Aと同様の材料を使用することができるが、撓ませることができ離型し易い点で、シリコーン系樹脂又はオレフィン系樹脂を使用することが好ましい。
The resin 42A can use the same material as the resin 22A of the submaster 20 of the first embodiment, but uses a silicone resin or an olefin resin because it can be bent and easily released. It is preferable to do.
サブサブマスター基板46も、サブマスター基板26と同様の材料を使用することができる。
The same material as the sub master substrate 26 can be used for the sub sub master substrate 46.
次に、図5、図6を参照しながら、ウエハレンズ1の製造方法について簡単に説明する。
Next, a method for manufacturing the wafer lens 1 will be briefly described with reference to FIGS.
図5(a)に示す通り、マスター10B上に樹脂32Aを塗布し、樹脂32Aを硬化させ、マスター10Bの凹部16を樹脂32Aに転写し、樹脂32Aに対し複数の凸部34を形成する。これにより、サブマスター成形部32が形成される。
As shown in FIG. 5A, a resin 32A is applied on the master 10B, the resin 32A is cured, the concave portions 16 of the master 10B are transferred to the resin 32A, and a plurality of convex portions 34 are formed on the resin 32A. Thereby, the submaster molding part 32 is formed.
図5(b)に示す通り、サブマスター成形部32に対しサブマスター基板36を接着する。
As shown in FIG. 5B, the sub master substrate 36 is bonded to the sub master molding portion 32.
その後、図5(c)に示す通り、マスター10Bからサブマスター成形部32とサブマスター基板36とを離型し、サブマスター30が作製される。
Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 5C, the sub-master molding part 32 and the sub-master substrate 36 are released from the master 10B, and the sub-master 30 is manufactured.
その後、図5(d)に示す通り、サブマスター30上に樹脂42Aを塗布し、樹脂42Aを硬化させ、サブマスター30の凸部34を樹脂42Aに転写し、樹脂42Aに対し複数の凹部44を形成する。これにより、サブサブマスター成形部42が形成される。
Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 5D, a resin 42A is applied on the sub master 30, the resin 42A is cured, and the convex portions 34 of the sub master 30 are transferred to the resin 42A. Form. Thereby, the sub-submaster molding part 42 is formed.
その後、図5(e)に示す通り、サブサブマスター成形部42に対しサブサブマスター基板46を装着する。
Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 5 (e), the sub-sub master substrate 46 is mounted on the sub-sub master molding portion 42.
図6(f)に示す通り、サブマスター30からサブサブマスター成形部42とサブサブマスター基板46とを離型し、サブサブマスター40が作製される。
As shown in FIG. 6F, the sub-sub-master 40 is manufactured by releasing the sub-sub-master molding part 42 and the sub-sub-master substrate 46 from the sub-master 30.
図6(g)に示す通り、サブサブマスター40の凹部44に対し樹脂5Aを充填し、その上方からガラス基板3を押圧しながら樹脂5Aを硬化させる。その結果、樹脂5Aからレンズ部5が形成される。その後、レンズ部5とガラス基板3とをサブサブマスター40から離型し、ウエハレンズ1が製造される(ウエハレンズ1はガラス基板3の表面にのみレンズ部5が形成されたものである。)。
As shown in FIG. 6G, the resin 5A is filled into the recess 44 of the sub-sub master 40, and the resin 5A is cured while pressing the glass substrate 3 from above. As a result, the lens portion 5 is formed from the resin 5A. Thereafter, the lens unit 5 and the glass substrate 3 are released from the sub-submaster 40, and the wafer lens 1 is manufactured (the wafer lens 1 has the lens unit 5 formed only on the surface of the glass substrate 3). .
ガラス基板3の裏面にもレンズ部5を形成してガラス基板3の表裏両面に対しレンズ部5を形成する場合には、ガラス基板3の一方の面のレンズ部5の光学面形状に対応するネガ形状の成形面を複数有するマスター(図示せず)と、他方の面のレンズ部5の光学面形状に対応するネガ形状の成形面を複数有するマスターとを用意し、これらの各マスターを用いて、ポジ形状の成形面を有するサブマスターを形成し、更に、これらの各サブマスターを用いてサブサブマスターを形成する。そして、各サブサブマスターと、ガラス基板3との間に樹脂5Aを充填した後、樹脂5Aを硬化させてガラス基板3の両面にレンズ部5を成形する。
When the lens unit 5 is formed on the back surface of the glass substrate 3 and the lens unit 5 is formed on both the front and back surfaces of the glass substrate 3, it corresponds to the optical surface shape of the lens unit 5 on one surface of the glass substrate 3. A master (not shown) having a plurality of negative-shaped molding surfaces and a master having a plurality of negative-shaped molding surfaces corresponding to the optical surface shape of the lens portion 5 on the other surface are prepared, and each of these masters is used. Then, a sub master having a positive molding surface is formed, and further, a sub sub master is formed using each of these sub masters. And after filling resin 5A between each sub-submaster and the glass substrate 3, the resin 5A is hardened and the lens part 5 is shape | molded on both surfaces of the glass substrate 3. FIG.
Claims (8)
- 基板に対し第1の硬化性樹脂製の光学部材が設けられたウエハレンズの製造方法であって、
前記光学部材の光学面形状に対応したポジ形状の成形面を複数有するマスター成形型から、前記光学面形状に対応したネガ形状の成形面を複数有するサブマスター成形部を第2の硬化性樹脂によって成形するとともに、当該サブマスター成形部をサブマスター基板で裏打ちすることによってサブマスター成形型を形成し、
当該サブマスター成形型と、前記基板との間に前記第1の硬化性樹脂を充填して硬化させ前記光学部材を成形する場合に、
前記第1の硬化性樹脂として、下記一般式(A)で表されるエポキシ化合物を使用することを特徴とするウエハレンズの製造方法。
〔式(A)中、R100は置換基を表し、m0は0~2の整数を、r0は1~3の整数を表す。L0は主鎖に酸素原子または硫黄原子を含んでも良い炭素数1~15のr0+1価の連結基または単結合を表す。〕 A wafer lens manufacturing method in which an optical member made of a first curable resin is provided on a substrate,
From a master mold having a plurality of positive molding surfaces corresponding to the optical surface shape of the optical member, a sub master molding part having a plurality of negative molding surfaces corresponding to the optical surface shape is formed by the second curable resin. And forming a sub master mold by backing the sub master molding part with a sub master substrate,
When the optical member is molded by filling the first curable resin between the sub-master mold and the substrate and curing the mold,
An epoxy compound represented by the following general formula (A) is used as the first curable resin.
[In the formula (A), R 100 represents a substituent, m0 represents an integer of 0 to 2, and r0 represents an integer of 1 to 3. L 0 represents an r0 + 1-valent linking group or a single bond having 1 to 15 carbon atoms, which may contain an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom in the main chain. ] - 下記一般式(A)で表されるエポキシ化合物を含有することを特徴とするウエハレンズ。
〔式(A)中、R100は置換基を表し、m0は0~2の整数を、r0は1~3の整数を表す。L0は主鎖に酸素原子または硫黄原子を含んでも良い炭素数1~15のr0+1価の連結基または単結合を表す。〕 A wafer lens comprising an epoxy compound represented by the following general formula (A):
[In the formula (A), R 100 represents a substituent, m0 represents an integer of 0 to 2, and r0 represents an integer of 1 to 3. L 0 represents an r0 + 1-valent linking group or a single bond having 1 to 15 carbon atoms, which may contain an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom in the main chain. ] - 下記一般式(I)で表されるエポキシ化合物を含有することを特徴とするウエハレンズ。
〔式(I)中、R101は置換基を表し、m1は0~2の整数を、p1、q1はそれぞれ0または1を、r1は1~3の整数を表す。L1は主鎖に酸素原子または硫黄原子を含んでも良い炭素数1~15のr1+1価の連結基または単結合を表す。〕 A wafer lens comprising an epoxy compound represented by the following general formula (I):
[In the formula (I), R 101 represents a substituent, m1 represents an integer of 0 to 2, p1 and q1 each represents 0 or 1, and r1 represents an integer of 1 to 3. L 1 represents an r1 + 1 valent linking group having 1 to 15 carbon atoms or a single bond which may contain an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom in the main chain. ] - 下記一般式(II)で表されるエポキシ化合物を含有することを特徴とするウエハレンズ。
〔式(II)中、R102は置換基を表し、m2は0~2の整数を、p2、q2はそれぞれ0または1を、r2は1~3の整数を表す。L2は主鎖に酸素原子または硫黄原子を含んでも良い炭素数1~15のr2+1価の連結基または単結合を表す。〕 A wafer lens comprising an epoxy compound represented by the following general formula (II):
[In the formula (II), R 102 represents a substituent, m2 represents an integer of 0 to 2, p2 and q2 each represents 0 or 1, and r2 represents an integer of 1 to 3. L 2 represents an r2 + 1 valent linking group or a single bond having 1 to 15 carbon atoms, which may contain an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom in the main chain. ] - 下記一般式(III)~一般式(VI)で表されるエポキシ化合物の少なくとも1種を含有することを特徴とするウエハレンズ。
〔式(III)中、R103は置換基を表し、m3は0~2の整数を、p3は0または1を表す。L3は主鎖に酸素原子または硫黄原子を含んでも良い炭素数1~8の2価の連結基または単結合を表す。〕
〔式(IV)中、R104は置換基を表し、m4は0~2の整数を、p4は0または1を表す。L4は主鎖に酸素原子または硫黄原子を含んでも良い炭素数1~8の2価の連結基または単結合を表す。〕
〔式(V)中、R105は置換基を表し、m5は1または2を表す。〕
〔式(VI)中、R106は置換基を表し、m6は0~2の整数を表す。〕 A wafer lens comprising at least one epoxy compound represented by the following general formulas (III) to (VI):
[In the formula (III), R 103 represents a substituent, m3 represents an integer of 0 to 2, and p3 represents 0 or 1. L 3 represents a C 1-8 divalent linking group or single bond which may contain an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom in the main chain. ]
[In the formula (IV), R 104 represents a substituent, m4 represents an integer of 0 to 2, and p4 represents 0 or 1. L 4 represents a C 1-8 divalent linking group or single bond that may contain an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom in the main chain. ]
[In Formula (V), R 105 represents a substituent, and m5 represents 1 or 2. ]
[In the formula (VI), R 106 represents a substituent, and m6 represents an integer of 0 to 2. ] - 紫外線照射により酸を発生する光酸発生剤を含有することを特徴とする請求項2~5のいずれか1項に記載のウエハレンズ。 6. The wafer lens according to claim 2, further comprising a photoacid generator that generates an acid upon irradiation with ultraviolet rays.
- 前記光酸発生剤がスルホニウム塩化合物であることを特徴とする請求項6に記載のウエハレンズ。 The wafer lens according to claim 6, wherein the photoacid generator is a sulfonium salt compound.
- オキセタン化合物を含有することを特徴とする請求項2~7のいずれか1項に記載のウエハレンズ。 The wafer lens according to any one of claims 2 to 7, further comprising an oxetane compound.
Applications Claiming Priority (2)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
JP2008-100077 | 2008-04-08 | ||
JP2008100077 | 2008-04-08 |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
WO2009125677A1 true WO2009125677A1 (en) | 2009-10-15 |
Family
ID=41161811
Family Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
PCT/JP2009/056094 WO2009125677A1 (en) | 2008-04-08 | 2009-03-26 | Method for producing wafer lens and wafer lens |
Country Status (1)
Country | Link |
---|---|
WO (1) | WO2009125677A1 (en) |
Cited By (3)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
WO2012169120A1 (en) * | 2011-06-07 | 2012-12-13 | コニカミノルタアドバンストレイヤー株式会社 | Composite body production method and composite body |
CN104875312A (en) * | 2015-04-22 | 2015-09-02 | 超威电源有限公司 | Epoxy resin sample block preparing mold |
CN115028804A (en) * | 2022-06-16 | 2022-09-09 | 深圳市恒纬祥科技有限公司 | Alicyclic epoxy resin for semiconductor pouring sealant and synthetic method thereof |
Citations (6)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JPS6192450A (en) * | 1984-10-11 | 1986-05-10 | Sumitomo Bakelite Co Ltd | Substrate for optical recording medium and forming method of substrate |
JP2004117955A (en) * | 2002-09-27 | 2004-04-15 | Nippon Telegr & Teleph Corp <Ntt> | Manufacturing method of micro resin lens |
JP2004163490A (en) * | 2002-11-11 | 2004-06-10 | Nippon Sheet Glass Co Ltd | Optical element and its manufacturing method |
JP2006523728A (en) * | 2003-04-14 | 2006-10-19 | ミヌタ・テクノロジー・カンパニー・リミテッド | Resin composition for mold used for formation of fine pattern and method for producing organic mold therefrom |
JP2006343709A (en) * | 2004-10-07 | 2006-12-21 | Jsr Corp | Radiation sensitive resin composition, microlens and process for forming the same, and liquid crystal display device |
WO2007119391A1 (en) * | 2006-03-22 | 2007-10-25 | San-Apro Limited | Actinic energy radiation negative-working photoresist composition and cured product thereof |
-
2009
- 2009-03-26 WO PCT/JP2009/056094 patent/WO2009125677A1/en active Application Filing
Patent Citations (6)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JPS6192450A (en) * | 1984-10-11 | 1986-05-10 | Sumitomo Bakelite Co Ltd | Substrate for optical recording medium and forming method of substrate |
JP2004117955A (en) * | 2002-09-27 | 2004-04-15 | Nippon Telegr & Teleph Corp <Ntt> | Manufacturing method of micro resin lens |
JP2004163490A (en) * | 2002-11-11 | 2004-06-10 | Nippon Sheet Glass Co Ltd | Optical element and its manufacturing method |
JP2006523728A (en) * | 2003-04-14 | 2006-10-19 | ミヌタ・テクノロジー・カンパニー・リミテッド | Resin composition for mold used for formation of fine pattern and method for producing organic mold therefrom |
JP2006343709A (en) * | 2004-10-07 | 2006-12-21 | Jsr Corp | Radiation sensitive resin composition, microlens and process for forming the same, and liquid crystal display device |
WO2007119391A1 (en) * | 2006-03-22 | 2007-10-25 | San-Apro Limited | Actinic energy radiation negative-working photoresist composition and cured product thereof |
Cited By (3)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
WO2012169120A1 (en) * | 2011-06-07 | 2012-12-13 | コニカミノルタアドバンストレイヤー株式会社 | Composite body production method and composite body |
CN104875312A (en) * | 2015-04-22 | 2015-09-02 | 超威电源有限公司 | Epoxy resin sample block preparing mold |
CN115028804A (en) * | 2022-06-16 | 2022-09-09 | 深圳市恒纬祥科技有限公司 | Alicyclic epoxy resin for semiconductor pouring sealant and synthetic method thereof |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
JP5429159B2 (en) | Wafer lens manufacturing method | |
KR101568892B1 (en) | Curable resin composition for nanoimprint | |
JP5617636B2 (en) | Wafer lens manufacturing method | |
CN101479662B (en) | Printing form precursor and process for preparing a stamp from the precursor | |
JP5101343B2 (en) | Manufacturing method of fine structure | |
CN101872115B (en) | The Method and process of modifying polymer material surface interactions | |
JP5440492B2 (en) | Wafer lens manufacturing method | |
TW200846824A (en) | Curing composition for photonano-imprinting lithography and pattern forming method by using the same | |
JP5212463B2 (en) | Wafer lens manufacturing method | |
KR20140068144A (en) | Epoxy formulations and processes for fabrication of relief patterns on low surface energy substrates | |
JPWO2014084030A1 (en) | Method for producing fine structure and photocurable composition for nanoimprint | |
JP2009138116A (en) | Cation-polymerizable resin composition and cured material thereof | |
JP5327221B2 (en) | Method for manufacturing wafer lens or wafer lens assembly | |
WO2009125677A1 (en) | Method for producing wafer lens and wafer lens | |
JP2009226638A (en) | Method for manufacturing wafer lens | |
JP5488464B2 (en) | OPTICAL ELEMENT, OPTICAL ELEMENT MANUFACTURING METHOD, AND ELECTRONIC DEVICE MANUFACTURING METHOD | |
JP5315737B2 (en) | Wafer lens manufacturing method | |
JP2009226637A (en) | Method for manufacturing master molding die | |
JP5130977B2 (en) | Sub master mold manufacturing method | |
JP5551087B2 (en) | Modeling method | |
JPWO2017195548A1 (en) | Photo-curable composition for nanoimprint, and method for producing optical component | |
WO2018179842A1 (en) | Silicone mold | |
JP2010015095A (en) | Optical element, method of manufacturing optical element and method of manufacturing electronic device |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
121 | Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application |
Ref document number: 09729831 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |
|
NENP | Non-entry into the national phase |
Ref country code: DE |
|
122 | Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase |
Ref document number: 09729831 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |
|
NENP | Non-entry into the national phase |
Ref country code: JP |